JP7064781B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A conventional gaming machine generally includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means.

Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the determination result of the determination information and also execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (). For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-118109

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the gaming production and the interest of the gaming is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. And, a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means changes to a plurality of display modes as a variable display of the special symbol in one cycle. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the cycle variation a plurality of times, the display period of each display mode in one cycle of the cycle variation is made shorter than the execution period of the stop display of the special symbol, and the effect control means. Can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, display the corresponding display corresponding to the determination information on which the determination is executed, and display the correspondence display at a predetermined timing. It is possible to display the disappearance, and the disappearance display of the corresponding display is started at a timing after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation in the variation display of the special symbol, and the execution period of the stop display of the special symbol is executed. It is characterized in that the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends at the timing before the elapse of.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a part of the front side of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing of a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a hold icon, and (b) and (C) are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous staging determination process of a staging control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the big hit notice effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue notice pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a character advance notice pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout effect pattern determination table, and (c) is an example of a back cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows, and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol display. It is a figure which shows the display effect example for each effect mode. It is a figure which shows the display effect example of the hold number. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect starts from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 51. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 51. It is a timing chart when a start prize is won during a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 54. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is executed continuously. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 56. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 56. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is started without receiving the stop command normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 59. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 61. It is a timing chart when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a timing chart when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 69. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 69. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 72. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 72. It is a timing chart when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 75. It is a timing chart when the start command could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 79. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 79. It is a timing chart when the power-on designation command is received while the menu image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 82.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the gaming board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 described later are paid out based on the establishment of a grant condition. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, and a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become like. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when an abnormality occurs in which the glass frame 4 is opened or the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 or 2) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. See) are provided side by side.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive device 17b provided with a button drive motor for changing to a protruding state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode, and The effect button light emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a light-off state and a lighting state that emits light in a predetermined mode is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed to the game machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a full plate detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error in which the game ball is full is provided in the lower plate 12, and the full plate 12a is provided with a full plate detection switch 32a. While the fullness is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95 described later is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a 15a (see FIG. 5) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in the closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening substantially in the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 face the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. ..

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member, and launching from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail are provided. Then, the game ball sent to the launch position by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is opened. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game region 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left-handed game area in which the struck game ball flows down and a right-handed game area in which the game ball launched with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down. Is designed to communicate under the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 that allow game balls to always win (win) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) on which a game ball can always win (win) is provided, and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game ball (ball) is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning in the collision detection described later). A variable starting portion 46 is provided that can convert a game ball from a difficult closed state to a winning state or an easy open state.

The variable starting portion 46 has a second starting port opening / closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second starting port opening / closing member 48, while the upper surface of the variable starting portion 46 is inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to become a flow path for the game ball. A second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward just below the starting opening opening / closing member 48, and a second game ball that has won (winned) in the second starting opening 47. By moving the start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start port opening / closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second start port 47 is converted to the closed state and the second start port is closed. A second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) for converting the second starting opening 47 into an open state by moving the opening / closing member 48 toward the rear (winning allowable position) is provided.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 which is opened during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied). A predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which a game ball can always pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the normal map gate 44 is a gate detection switch 44a. If it is detected in, the prize ball is not given, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) as to whether or not to execute the hit game is given (the general map judgment information described later is stored).

Below the normal gate 44, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and the first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51. By moving the first large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the first large winning opening 50 and the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position). To convert the first large winning opening 50 to the closed state and to convert the first large winning opening 50 to the open state by moving the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the rear (winning allowable position). The first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game described later, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 When the game balls that have flowed down or the game balls that have reached the first prize opening 50 are detected by the first prize opening detection switch 50a when the game balls win the first prize opening 50, a predetermined number of them are detected. The game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

Below the first variable winning unit 49, it is possible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) (one of the bottom surfaces of the first downstream flow path 91e). Along with forming a portion), a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward just below the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57. And, the 2nd big prize opening detection switch 56a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the 2nd big winning opening 56 and the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing member 57 are moved forward (winning restriction position). By doing so, the second prize opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second prize opening 56 is converted to the open state by moving the second prize opening opening / closing member 57 toward the rear (winning allowable position). A second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57 moves backward and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, it flows down the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57. When the game ball that has been played or the game ball that has reached the second big prize opening 56 wins the second big winning opening 56 and is detected by the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) The game balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

The game ball launched into the left game area is either flowed down as it is along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage portion 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. A prize is won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50) and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right game area are won (the second major winning opening 56). There is no passing).

Further, the game ball launched into the right game area is passed through the upstream flow path 91a to the central flow path 91b (normal gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first. 2 One general winning opening 43, a variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), which are provided in the right gaming area by flowing down the downstream flow path 91f or the like. Either a prize is won in any of the second variable winning units 55 (second large winning opening 56), or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area are not won.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 50 and a second major winning opening 56, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path that accepts and collects out-balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down is provided, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, there is a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold. A hold display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a main information display 59 including a status confirmation display 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

The jackpot judgment is special symbol judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random for reach judgment) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. It corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) in a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on → 224 ms off). Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50, 2nd big winning opening 56) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode, with a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who easily obtains a prize ball by a player who performs the game over 4 times, 10 times, and the like.

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won (winning) in the large winning opening, one round game is completed. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

Auxiliary game judgment is the normal map judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal map gate 44. Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired general map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) of notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first hold (U1), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second hold (U2), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than four or more, or the second hold may not be stored.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal figure determination information (normal figure hold) stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or larger than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and if it is determined to be lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. If it is inside, it is advisable to repeat turning off and "-".

The round number display 66 is composed of 6 LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the number of rounds is 10 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a big hit state (special game) or a time-saving game state. It is for displaying, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the gaming machine 1 and may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked or vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 68 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, and the round number display are displayed. Since 66, the right-handed display 67 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these displays may be turned on.

Inside the game area 5a, there are a sub-first variation indicator 81, a sub-second variation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal map variation indicator 85, and a sub-general. Figure A sub information display 80 including a hold display 86 and a sub right-handed display 87 is provided. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display 80 is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the second special symbol is variable. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (lights up for 0.5 seconds → turns off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. do.

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information (first hold number) described later, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information described later (the number of second hold information). It is for displaying the second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the big hit state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is a lower part of the effect space 40a and is a main display device. In front of the 70, a sub display device 71 (second image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display having a size and a display area smaller than that of the main display device 70 is provided, and an operation is performed in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A movable effect device 73 for executing the effect is provided.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. The staging display includes a customer waiting demo effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed, and a variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation) of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display. There are a variation effect, a variation display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, a jackpot effect performed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the like.

Further, the sub display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving the sub display device 71 by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while the fluctuation effect is being executed by the main display device 70. ..

Specifically, it moves (ascends) in the vertical direction between the standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and the staging position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , Down) to create a moving effect. In addition, it may be swung up and down at the standby position (lower position) and the staging position (upper position), or may be swung up and down at the intermediate position between the standby position and the staging position. .. Further, the moving direction of the sub display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device), a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and a variable display area for variable effect. A mode display area or the like indicating an effect mode related to execution is formed.

The staging symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect symbol 70a is configured to stop and display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in an mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same staging symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is another mode.

The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination. This raises the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The main display device 70 includes a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in a normal gaming state described later, and a first hold icon display area 70B described later. The second hold icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state, and the fact that the variable effect is being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) to be shown, the first hold number display area SA for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and the second hold number (U2) are numerical values. A second reserved number display area SB or the like for display is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B has a first display unit 70B1 (first area), a second display unit 70B2 (second area), and a third display unit 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , 4th display unit 70B4 (4th area), and the 1st display unit 70B1 to the 4th display unit 70B4 have a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1). Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays the second hold icon. The first hold icon indicating the first hold information on which the change display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70B3 is the third to execute the change display of the first special symbol. The first hold icon indicating the hold information is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon showing the first hold information on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

The second hold icon display area 70D has a first display unit 70D1 (first area), a second display unit 70D2 (second area), a third display unit 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display unit 70D4 (from the left side). The first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 is displayed with the second special symbol change display executed second. A second hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and rides on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is moved toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting) and moving (shifting) the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the icon display area 70C, the icon becomes the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The icon disappears (erases) at the end of. In other words, the disappearance effect (erasure effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). ), The second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed on the main display device 70, but the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed on either or both of the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. May be done.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a are executed during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the main display device 70. By causing the movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a has a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (upper side) of the main display device 70 and an effect position located closer to the center (lower side) of the main display device 70. It is designed to move (ascend, descend) to and from (second position). The second movable member 73b is adapted to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. .. The first movable member 73a may be swung up and down at the standby position (first position) and the effect position (second position), or may be moved up and down at an intermediate position between the standby position and the effect position. It may be rocked. Further, instead of swinging the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b is swung left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position, the intermediate position, or the staging position, so that the first movable member 73a is first movable. The member 73a may appear to be swinging.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, games supplied from a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, and the like. A game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are built-in. An effect control device 130A, a power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer), and the like are provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes the volume of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, display devices (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting devices). 10. A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the panel lighting device 74) is provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (big hit). RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (of the probability of being determined), and a setting key switch for inputting a signal for shifting to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by the operation using the setting key. 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured (see FIG. 42). When displaying the set value, static lighting is performed, and when displaying performance information, dynamic lighting is performed.

(Composition of the game board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 constituting the front side of the game board 5 and a back surface unit 501 constituting the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a game plate 500a made of transparent resin in which a game area 5a is formed on the surface of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 described above, and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. ..

Then, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the solenoid gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), and the variable Starting unit 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning unit 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st big winning opening opening / closing member 51, 1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b), and 2nd variable winning section 55 (2nd big winning opening 56, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a, 2nd big winning opening opening / closing A member 57, a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b), a sub information display 80 are provided, and a main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

Further, at the lower right of the game plate 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp having identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are provided at the four corners of the 500a.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game plate 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with a fingertip and rotated toward the left side.

The fixture 503a is provided at the operation portion located on the front surface side of the game plate 500a, the shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back surface side of the game plate 500a, and the tip end of the shaft portion, and the back surface of the game plate 500a. It is equipped with an engaging piece located on the side, and by operating the operation unit, the engaging piece changes between the first state (non-engaged posture) and the second state (engaged posture). There is.

The back surface unit 501 has a unit base 501a in which the front surface is formed in a concave chamber shape and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. In the concave chamber, a sub-display device 71 is movable. An effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) and the like are provided, and a main display device 70 is provided behind the window portion. Further, an effect control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixed receiving portions 503b for detachably attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixing tool 503a described above are provided.

When the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the board unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side portion of the back surface unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a is in a state of entering the inside of the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging piece is set to the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging piece engages with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 And are fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 is opened. And the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate stamp plate 502. After that, when the engaging piece is set to the first state by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging piece and the fixed receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portion 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the gaming board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of a like-new game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment / detachment of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state where the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back surface unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, it is possible to replace (like new) only the board unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board unit 500, it is advisable to perform the above-mentioned removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the staging control board 130 that controls the staging related to the game based on the reception of the staging control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the staging control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130 is controlled by the staging control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It has 110m.

Out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start port detection switch 45a, second start port detection switch 47a, second start port opening / closing are connected to the input / output port of the main control unit 110m. Magnet 48b, 1st prize opening detection switch 50a, 1st prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2nd prize opening detection switch 56a, 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and effect control. The board 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch, detection sensor, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (detector, display, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

In the "game information", the start opening winning signal, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol variation display, which is output every time the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, is stopped. A symbol confirmation signal output for each, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of a big winning opening), and an output over a time-saving gaming state described later. Examples thereof include a time saving state signal to be executed, a security signal to be output when a problematic (threatening) situation (such as RWM clearing or error) occurs in the security of the gaming machine 1.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A game stack area for temporarily evacuating and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the progress of the game, the set value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the game progress. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used as the work by the information program, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on the information program Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the content of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but it can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are used in the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer in the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program returns to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 has an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout device 95 for paying out the game ball. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like.
A ball feed solenoid 11b, a touch sensor 15a, a firing volume 15b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch solenoid has a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. 28b is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The staging control board 130 displays an image based on the reception of the staging control unit 130m from the staging control unit 130m and the staging control unit 130m that comprehensively controls the progress of the staging based on the reception of the staging control command from the main control board 110. The display control unit 140 that controls the audio output, and the lamp control unit 150 that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130 m. It is equipped with.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc. are performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the staging control unit 130m to control the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound or sound to the sound output device 9. Control to make it.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. An image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a voice output device based on reception of a voice control command from the general control unit 141. It includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) for controlling 9 and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140 is output from the audio output device 9. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing a production sound and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame lighting device 10, a button drive device 17b (effect button drive motor, effect button vibration motor), an effect button light emitting LED 17c, a movable effect device 73, a panel lighting device 74, and a sub. Information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display The device 86 and the sub right-handed display 87) are connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the start port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). Supply to the staging control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power failure has occurred), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the power supply voltage drop (power failure occurred). It includes a disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is disconnected (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, staging control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 to detect the voltage drop. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the specified value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage (power outage) after the recovery from the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the staging control unit 130 m, the payout control board 120 and the payout control board 120 and the sub RAM 130c are retained so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). A backup power supply may be supplied to the staging control unit 130 m. Further, the backup power supply may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the staging control unit 130 m.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special game determination (big hit determination) has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state", and the state relating to the second starting port opening / closing member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time saving". It has a "state" and a "time saving state".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" which is a low-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" which is a low-probability state and time-saving state. , A "high probability time saving game state (probability variation game state)" which is a high probability state and a time saving state is provided.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal gaming state". Further, even during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the gaming state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is "1", the game is played in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. In the special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that the ball has entered, the game state in which the jackpot probability is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, the "high probability state" is a game that is advantageous to the player as compared with the low probability state because the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/60 when the set value is "1". The state. The transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the "non-time saving state" means that the winning probability is set as low as 1/256 in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, and the average of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set. A gaming state in which the time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.180 seconds when it is a hit.

On the other hand, in the "time saving state", the hit probability is set as high as 255/256, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and the second starting port 47 is hit. By setting the opening time to 6 seconds, the game state is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the game ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving state. The transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

It should be noted that the "time saving state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the hit probability are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state", but the average of the normal symbols. Only one of the fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the hit probability may be set to be advantageous.

Although the hit probability in the non-time saving state is 1/256, the hit probability may be set to 0/256 so that it is not determined as a hit. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time saving state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 6A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 6B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 6A to 6B, the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (big hit, loss). It is attached, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6B, and refers to the current set value, the probability state, and the jackpot. Based on the judgment random value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The judgment random value is determined to be a "big hit". Then, the random value for jackpot determination other than the jackpot determination is determined to be "missing".

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 7B is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 7A to 7B, the special symbol determination table corresponds to the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result. The stop special figure data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated with each other.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a jackpot special symbol for executing the first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is a jackpot symbol for executing the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "11" is a jackpot symbol. It is a jackpot symbol that executes the third jackpot game.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the first big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 6 times. ing. In the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the first large winning opening 50. Further, after the end of the first big hit game, the low probability non-time saving game state (time saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Further, after the end of the second big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

In the "third big hit game", a round game in which the second big winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to four times. Further, after the end of the third big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 7A to 7B, and the type of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the type of the special symbol is based on the random value for determining the special symbol. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7 is that the type of the jackpot special symbol and the type of the lost special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without complicating the game.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various lost symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8A is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 8B is a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination are used. Random value, first hold number (U1) or second hold number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol change time, special figure It is associated with a special figure fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, and refers to the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, the first hold number (U1), or the second hold. The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number (U2) and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the staging control board 130. There is.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is determined according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed. , Means to stop without reaching.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. , The mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It has become a reach.

Further, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach productions in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of normal reach, and are executed after normal reach. For example, the two effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70.

In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach, and is executed after super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special reach effect than the "SP reach". ing.

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 is blacked out from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and the "SPSP reach" is used almost the entire display area of the main display device 70. It has become more special reach production than.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the types of the special figure variation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 9A is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. 9 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pre-judgment table includes the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 9, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

(Various storage areas of the main RAM)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 10A is a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 and / or the second start opening 47 is stored. It is a figure which shows the determination information storage area, FIG. 10 (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 10D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal map determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. It corresponds to the unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display unit 70D1 and the second display unit 70D2 of the second reservation icon display area 70D. Corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (first reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and these special figure determinations are made. The number of first hold icons corresponding to the information will be displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the number of special figure determination information (second reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons will be displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 10B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random value.

Then, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored most in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the number of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is the smallest in which the special figure determination information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

When the start condition of the variation display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The determination information is shifted and will be referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reserved storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the normal map determination information storage area varies from the normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a normal map determination information storage area in which display is being executed, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. The number of normal map determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is the number of normal map reservation information.

As shown in FIG. 10D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a normal map fluctuation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the normal map fluctuation pattern determination random value.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and the normal map determination information is acquired, it is acquired in the storage unit having the smallest number in which the normal map determination information is not stored in the normal map determination information reserved storage area. The normal map judgment information is stored.

When the start condition of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the normal map judgment information execution storage area, shifts the normal figure judgment information stored in the 1st storage unit of the normal figure judgment information hold storage area. And will usually be referenced to perform variable display of symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, processing for preparing to start control of the game, processing for initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, and the like are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is transferred to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, the power supply can be momentarily dropped in voltage. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

The main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S61, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130 wait for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S17 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the step is assumed to be the first power-on or irregular power restoration. The process is transferred to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S18 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, assuming that the power is turned on for the first time or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. Will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the range is appropriate, the process is transferred to step S23, and if it is determined that the range is not appropriate, the process is transferred to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the staging control board 130 is to perform processing for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the main display device 70 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Non-recovery indicating that a display, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error has occurred from the audio output device 9. Possible error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S31. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. The indicated power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 do not display the initial screen, but the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared. You may do so.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S26 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process is performed to display the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

The "power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or to display a frame in order to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. That the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and that the power is restored from the audio output device 9 (from a power failure). The indicated power recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) is output over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and the main display device 70 is processed to display the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the staging control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the staging control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start before the game progress control is started, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing trouble to the gaming store and the player.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the status confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, and the frame are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel, and on the back surface (back surface), it is recognized that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, although the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including the information indicating the current game state, the current game state is sent after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting changing signal (security signal) in step S19-1. Specifically, the output of the setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the staging control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or to set the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. It is a notification that all lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the change. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the settings are being changed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a acquires a set value from the set value area in step S19-4, and determines whether or not the acquired set value is within an appropriate range (1 to 4) in step S19-5. If it is determined that the range is appropriate, the process is transferred to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the range is not appropriate, the acquisition setting value is updated to "1" in step S19-6.

The main CPU 110a displays the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-7. Specifically, the acquisition set values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-8 whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the acquisition set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, when the acquisition setting value is "5", the process of correcting the acquisition setting value to "1" is performed.

In step S19-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the updated acquisition setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the confirmation by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. 2 Performs processing for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-13 whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S19-14 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is transferred to step S19-8 as it may be performed.

The main CPU 110a saves the updated acquisition set value in the set value area in step S19-14, ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-15, and in step S19-16. The display of the status confirmation display 68 is terminated.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is unexpected. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the gaming store and the player by performing the operation.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode), the game clerk is on the front (front surface) of the game machine 1 with a status confirmation display 68, a main display device 70, a sub display device 71, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 74, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (rear surface). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting value confirmation operation was set so that the setting key switch 112a was changed from the ON state to the OFF state, but the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be OFF. It may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the opening detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be turned on.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the staging control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the staging control board is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the main display device 70 to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to notify "Please press the RWM clear switch again" from the voice output device 9. This is a notification that outputs voice over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The processing for initial operation of the two major winning opening opening / closing solenoids 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is moved to step S24-4 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, step S24-2 is performed. Move the process.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) a region other than the set value region of the game RWM region of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear process.

The RWM clear preparation specification command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear process, and the power-on specification command is transmitted after the RWM clear process is completed. However, the RWM clear specification command is transmitted instead of the power-on specification command. You may try to do it. In this case, the RWM clear designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S27-1. Specifically, the output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S27-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the staging control board 130. As a result, the process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" is to display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or to confirm the setting of the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. It is a notification that all lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

In step S27-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. 2 Performs processing for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S27-6 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and ends the confirmation end operation in step S27-9. As the setting confirmation mode ends, processing is performed to stop the initial operation of various drive sources, and the current setting confirmation processing ends.

The setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Then, instead of the power recovery specification command, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, it is possible to output many types of signals even with a limited number of signal terminals, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Further, from the start of power supply until the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), inputs other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are input. Devices (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first major winning opening detection switch 50a, second major winning opening The presence / absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

That is, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if the game ball wins in various winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalid and the gaming ball is not paid out. It has become like. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the winning becomes invalid and the special symbol changes in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. The display is not performed and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalid and the normal symbol display is not displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 62, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the game will be performed by the player before the progress control of the game is started.

Further, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if various errors occur, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that fraudulent acts will be performed before the progress control of the game is started.

The setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
A timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds). It is executed by that, and it is designed to control the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs a time control process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program). Specifically, the update of the random number value for jackpot judgment, the random number value for special symbol judgment, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the random number value for hit judgment, the random number value for normal symbol judgment, and the random number value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, as in step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program). Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. Processing such as opening / closing (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the Fuzu-fuden control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, variable display of the normal symbol, opening / closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like is performed.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second). A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the large winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 when not in an auxiliary game, or a game ball winning in a large winning opening when not in a special game, various winnings An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls won in the mouth and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning ball to flow down do not match, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period, a door opening error that the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and the RWM clear switch 111a while the progress control of the game is being performed. And an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is determined, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the staging control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process (game program) in step S700. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second large winning. Large prize opening / closing data output to the mouth opening / closing solenoid 57b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, and the first 1 Performs a process of creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, and special symbol. Display output processing that outputs signals such as hold display data and normal symbol hold display data, and a payout status confirmation specification command for checking the payout status of the payout control board 120 can be sent to the payout control board 120, and awards to be described later. With reference to the ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. .. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and out during the normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting the numbers, it is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which is useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a normally performs a base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is initially updated when the total number of outs in the normal game state reaches 300, and then updated every time the total number of outs in the normal game state reaches 60,000. , The base storage area is the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored, the second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, and the game section two times before. A third area for storing the normal base value and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game section three times before are provided, and the normal base value for the four game sections including the present is provided. Will be saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode) before the game progress control is started, so that the payout is performed. Since the number and the number of outs are not counted, the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, for determining whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and paying out the winning ball from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, has the detection signal been input from the first prize opening detection switch 50a or the second prize opening detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball has won the first prize opening 50 or the second prize opening 56. It is determined whether or not the prize ball has been paid out, and a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, and acquiring and storing the normal map determination information. I do. When this process is completed, the current input control process is terminated.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is less than 4. If the first hold number (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the first hold number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first hold number (U1) is set. The corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S230-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving state (normal gaming state) is in progress. If the player is in the non-time saving state, the process is transferred to step S230-9 to perform the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is not in the non-time saving state. In this case, the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is not performed, and the present first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 9 is referred to, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special figure). A process of generating a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the scheduled fluctuation pattern) is performed.

Since this "first look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern, the staging control board 130 uses the first look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the determination result of jackpot determination, and the special symbol. The type can also be specified.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130, and even before the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started, the jackpot game is over one or a plurality of variation displays. The look-ahead notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that is expected to be executed will be executed.

As for the second start port detection switch input process, the same process as the first start port detection switch input process is performed. Therefore, the first start port detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counters, and the first hold number (U1). ), 1st special figure determination information hold storage area, non-time saving state, 1st look-ahead processing, 1st look-ahead designation command part, 2nd start port detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counters, 2nd hold number (U2) ), The second special figure determination information hold storage area, the time saving state, the second look-ahead process, and the second look-ahead designation command may be read.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the second hold. Further, the first reserved information may not be stored by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the first hold. Further, the second reserved storage may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the change display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the hold storage (special figure judgment information), the change time is set, and the start command (special). Performs processing for transmitting the symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) to the effect control board 130, processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and the like. The special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for this purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped according to the passage of the variation time, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (symbol confirmation command) is output. The special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing the processing for transmitting to 130, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is lost due to the passage of the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol, and the big hit special symbol is a big hit. The opening time of the game is set, and the processing for transmitting the opening designation command to the effect control board 130 and the special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started according to the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game, and the process for transmitting the round designation command to the staging control board 130 and the big hit game based on the end of the final round game. The jackpot game process (step S340) for setting the ending time of the above and transmitting the ending designation command to the staging control board 130, the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", and the like is executed. ..

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for ending the jackpot game with the passage of the ending time and the gaming state after the jackpot end (low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state, high probability number of times, time saving number of times) ), The special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0", and the big hit game end processing (step S350) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S310-1 whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the second reserved number (U2), and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the subtracted second reserved number (U2) is specified. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first hold number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first hold number (U1) after the subtraction. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-8. The shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first hold number (U1) and the second hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reserved storage area and shifted (the second reserved number is first reserved). Although it was decided to prioritize subtraction over the number, the first special figure determination information reserved storage area or the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted (first) in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. The number of holds and the number of second holds may be subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information hold storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure judgment information hold storage area (the first hold number may be deducted). It may be subtracted in preference to the second reserved number).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special figure judgment information (random value for big hit judgment) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, is collated with the big hit judgment table shown in FIG. Judge whether or not. Further, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and the special symbol is stopped. Performs the process of determining the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is obtained. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will display the variation of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is issued for directing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a performance display data setting process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the information saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching time counter has a display switching value "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is transferred to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process is performed. , The process is transferred to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S850-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is transferred to step S850-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is performed. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in step S850-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S850-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is transferred to step S850-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is transferred to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. ..

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S85-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, the main RAM 110c is used for the information of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is terminated.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In the table of display information of FIG. 22, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the interval counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which does not reach a sufficient quantity for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed on the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 56 by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 56a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Main processing of the staging control unit)
The main process of the staging control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main process in the staging control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interruptions in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) the entire RWM area (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6, all interruptions are permitted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the staging control unit)
A timer interrupt process of the staging control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the staging control unit 130 m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer update process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary for executing the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display or the special game (big hit game) is not executed, and the customer waiting time has elapsed. Based on the above, the process for executing the customer waiting effect for stimulating the player's motivation to play is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the jackpot notice effect execution process in step E500. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the jackpot notice effect set in the sub RAM 130c in the jackpot notice effect determination process described later (expecting that the jackpot game is executed). ) Perform processing to execute the jackpot notice effect.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect execution process at the time of winning. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the prize-winning light-emitting effect set in the sub RAM 130c in the prize-winning light-emitting effect determination process described later (that the jackpot game is executed). (Expected) Perform processing to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E700. Specifically, the update condition (game state) of the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, main display device 70, sub display device 71, etc. are defined. Change, winning the mode update lottery, executing SP / SPSP reach effect that results in a loss, etc.) is determined, and if the update condition is satisfied, the effect mode is set to one of multiple effect modes. Perform the process to update to.

The "effect mode" includes the effect modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving game state) and the effect modes D to E set in the probability variation game state (high probability time saving game state). An effect mode F that is set in a gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) is provided. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.), the effect mode initially set is always the effect mode A, and the power supply is used. The effect mode that is set first when controlled to the probabilistic gaming state when ON is always the effect mode D, and the effect mode that is set first when controlled to the time-saving gaming state when the power is turned ON. Is always in the production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E800. Specifically, it performs a process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Command analysis processing of the staging control unit)
The command analysis process of the staging control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the staging control unit 130 m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command is received, the process is transferred to step E302, and if no command is received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E303, and if it is not a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs the power ON notification process in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power recovery designation command. If this is the case, the process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification, and the movable staging device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable). A process for executing an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the panel lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like is performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error-type designation command, the process is transferred to step E309, and if it is not an error-type specification command, the process is transferred to step E310.

"Error-based specification commands" include non-recoverable error specification commands, illegal winning error specification commands, abnormal winning error specification commands, magnetic error specification commands, radio wave error specification commands, door open error start specification commands, and door open error end specifications. Includes commands, operation error specification commands, dish full error specification commands, payout error specification commands, etc. The order of priority of each error is as follows: payout error = dish full error <operation error <door opening error <radio error = magnetic error <abnormal winning error = illegal winning error <unrecoverable error.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) , Discharge error notification, payout error notification, etc.), the notification command command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. It should be noted that various error notifications are performed using at least one of the output of an error sound, the error emission of a lamp, and the display of an error image. Specifically, in the dish full error notification, there is no lamp error emission, and in the payout abnormality notification, there is no error sound output, but in other error notifications, the error sound output, the lamp error emission, and the error. All of the image display is done.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E311. If it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command is performed.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process is transferred to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure hold number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting an effect instruction command for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. I do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icons displayed on the main display device 70 is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a look-ahead designation command. If it is a look-ahead designation command, set the received look-ahead designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) in the look-ahead storage area described later in the sub RAM 130c, and then move to step E315. If it is not a look-ahead designation command, The process is transferred to step E318.

The "look-ahead storage area" sequentially stores the first look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing the look-ahead information (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead designation command, and the hold information based on the second look-ahead designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing the look-ahead information (0th storage unit) for storing the look-ahead information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) during execution, and the first look-ahead storage unit and the first The two look-ahead storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the first look-ahead storage unit corresponds to the first to fourth storage units. The look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to one reserved number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second look-ahead designation command is received, the second look-ahead storage unit is used. 2 Look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reserved numbers. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure determination information execution storage area, and is the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. To.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect determination process in step E315. Specifically, the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by displaying the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 or the icon in a special display mode (special icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon) (special display mode). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect suggesting (possibility), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect determination process at the time of winning. Specifically, when the game ball is awarded to the starting port, the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is made to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode. Performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which suggests the degree of expectation to be executed, and the effect mode of the light emitting effect at the time of winning to be executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in step E317. Specifically, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols (suggesting the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the look-ahead continuous effect and the type of the look-ahead continuous effect to be executed are determined, and an effect instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to execute the look-ahead continuous effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs the symbol data determination process in step E319. Specifically, a process of determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line is performed.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E321, and if it is not a special map variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs the variation effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the main display device 70, is determined, and the variation effect pattern is shown. The process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot advance notice effect determination process. Specifically, whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (expected that the jackpot game will be executed) based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E321. Or, the effect mode (pattern) of the big hit notice effect to be executed is determined, and the execution information of the big hit advance notice effect is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The details of the jackpot notice production determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon display mode update process in step E323. Specifically, a process for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, or changing the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a symbol determination command (stop command). If it is a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process is transferred to step E326, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process is transferred to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variation effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designated command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process is transferred to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes an opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the jackpot game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round specification command. To determine the round effect of the round game and set the effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and in the case of the ending designation command, determine the ending effect of the jackpot game. Then, a process of setting an effect instruction command for executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 26, the icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E315-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a non-time saving state (normal game state) when the jackpot game is not being executed and the first look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first start port 45 is received. That is, when the second look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the second starting port 47 is received, it is in a time-saving state (probability variation game state or time-saving game state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance hold (holding storage corresponding to the previously received look-ahead designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the look-ahead information storage area. Is determined. If there is a change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and steps E315-5. In, the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, referring to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 27, a plurality of icons are based on the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the final display modes.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E315-8 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is a special icon (any of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the final disappearance of the icon.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 28, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Determine one change scenario from multiple change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is a display mode of the icon first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device) from the determined change scenario, and the winning icon. Set the icon display command of to the transmission buffer, and end the icon change effect determination process this time.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined image is displayed. A sound effect (first winning sound when displayed with a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed with a special icon) may be output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined image is displayed. A sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. By doing so, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the advance hold includes a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) than the case where the icon change effect is included. In addition, the icon change when the advance hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) than when a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.) is included. The effect may be easy to execute (executed at a high rate), or vice versa.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 27 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final The display mode is associated with the display mode, and as a reference, the effect content of the scheduled fluctuation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead designation command is described.

In the final display mode of the icon, a normal icon (white icon whose shape is set for each production mode) that does not suggest the expectation of a big hit and a special icon (common in multiple production modes) that suggests the expectation of a big hit. The shape blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) is set. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of blue icon <red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed) <rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 28 is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state (icon of the first special symbol) or the specific game state (icon of the second special symbol). For example, the specific game is determined. In the case of a state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate of change of the icon due to the change is higher than the rate of change of the icon due to the advance change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). You may. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher in the specific gaming state (icon of the second special symbol) than in the normal gaming state (icon of the first special symbol). You may.

(Change pattern determination table)
FIG. 29 is a change pattern determination table for determining the hold / change pattern of the icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

FIG. 29 (a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon referred to when determining the change pattern of the hold icon, and FIGS. 29 (b) to 29 (c) show the change pattern of the icon. It is a figure which shows the change pattern determination table for the said icon referred when determining.

The change pattern determination table corresponds to the mode of hold / icon change in this variation effect, variation effect pattern, selection rate of each hold / icon change pattern, and selected hold / icon change pattern type. It is attached, and for reference, each hold / hold in the icon change pattern / change effect occurrence timing and change stage of the icon are described.

The hold / icon change pattern is a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect, or a trigger for the hold / icon to change depending on the character A displayed on the main display device 70. An opportunity effect is performed to hold / the icon is changed by the character A action change pattern and the character B displayed on the main display device 70. The display mode of the icon is changed by performing a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon by the character B action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon is held / changed and the character C displayed on the main display device 70. A character C action change pattern and a character D action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon changes by performing a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon by the character D displayed on the main display device 70 are set. ..

The change timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variation effect, and is classified into the pre-reach effect period executed at the beginning of the variation effect. There are during and after normal reach, which are classified into reach production periods that may be performed after.

As a change mode of the hold icon, "1UP" means that the jackpot expectation degree such that the white icon changes to a blue icon or the blue icon changes to a red icon changes to a display mode one step higher. It means that. "2UP" means that the jackpot expectation level, for example, the white icon changes to a red icon or the blue icon changes to a rainbow icon, changes to a display mode two levels higher. Further, the "SP suggestion" means that the suggestion effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed by the character who performed the trigger effect is executed.

The first feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that in the normal reach variation effect, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the SP reach variation effect, the icon change effect (predictive sign) for this normal reach variation effect. The jackpot expectation is higher when the icon change effect (predictive effect) targeting this normal reach variation effect is executed than when the effect) is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that when the jackpot game is executed, the normal reach variation effect is executed without executing the icon change effect (hold notice). However, the rate at which the normal reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher, and after the icon change effect is executed than at the rate at which the normal reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. The rate at which the SP reach effect is executed is higher, and the rate at which the SP SP reach effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the SP reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. When the jackpot game is not executed, the rate at which the SP reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the normal reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. The point is that the ratio of the SP SP reach effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed is lower than the ratio of the SP reach effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that when the normal reach variation effect, the SP reach variation effect, or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is more than the reach effect period. The point is that the icon change effect is executed (prone to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the reach effect and the icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the SP reach fluctuation effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach effect or during the SPSP reach effect). It is easy to occur), but the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

The fourth feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that when the normal reach variation effect, the SP reach variation effect, or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is more than the reach effect period. The point is that the hold icon change effect is executed (prone to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the reach effect and the hold icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the SP reach fluctuation effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach effect or during the SPSP reach effect). It is easy to occur), but the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

The fifth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that the type of suggestive effect (character as an opportunity to change the hold icon) suggesting that the hold icon changes is the hold icon. There are different points depending on the content of the change (character A in the case of white → blue, character B in the case of blue → red). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that the type of suggestive effect (character as an opportunity to change the icon) suggesting that the icon changes is the type of the icon. Different points depending on the content of change (character A in the case of white → blue, character B in the case of blue → red, character C in the case of white → red, character D in the case of blue → rainbow) Be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, the SP reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) that suggests, but if the icon is a red icon, the SP reach effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) has been executed. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the delight of the player for the execution of the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-reading continuous staging determination process of the staging control unit)
A look-ahead continuous staging determination process in the staging control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E317-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the process is moved to step E317-4, and if it is not the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the look-ahead zone effect based on the read-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-6.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is a zone-in-zone effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image or a red thermal zone image, output of a zone BGM or a thermal zone BGM) over one or a plurality of variable effects. This is a production that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by the background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of pre-reading continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead zone effect" includes that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and the like. In the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, and the look-ahead zone effect may not be executed except in the normal game state. In the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed, and the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed except in the normal game state. The zone effect may be made feasible.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 31, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), and the selection rate of each advance notice scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in step E317-7 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the look-ahead effect effect. If it is the pre-reading effect effect executable period, the process is moved to step E317-9, and if it is not the pre-reading effect effect executable period, the pre-reading effect effect based on the pre-reading specification command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead effect effect" is a special game executed by executing an effect effect (displaying an effect image around the effect symbol 70a that starts variable display, outputting an effect sound effect) over one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be achieved by effect images and sound information, and is a kind of pre-reading continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead effect effect" includes that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead effect effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the like. It should be noted that the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the normal game state, and the look-ahead effect effect may not be executed except in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect cannot be executed in the normal game state, and the look-ahead effect cannot be executed in other than the normal game state. The effect effect may be made executable.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a look-ahead effect effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead effect effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each effect scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead effect effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading effect effect scenario determined in step E317-12 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead effect effect is performed. When this process is completed, the pre-reading continuous effect determination process is terminated.

(Look-ahead zone production scenario determination table)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the effect scenario of each look-ahead zone effect, and the selected look-ahead. The effect scenarios of the zone effect are associated with each other, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect in the change are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "zone" means that the normal zone effect (displaying the look-ahead zone background image, displaying the blue zone image, and outputting the zone BGM) is executed, and the "heat zone" means that the normal zone is used. The effect in the heat zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the red heat zone image, output of the heat zone BGM), which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect, is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and a scenario in which the zone-in-zone effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the zone-in-zone effect is executed during the change (for example). For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the in-zone effect is executed during the pre-variation and the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 31 is an effect scenario in which the effect mode of the effect in the zone does not progress (change) to an effect mode in which the expectation for executing a special game is high, and an effect of the effect in the zone. One point is that a staging scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a staging mode in which the degree of expectation for executing a special game is high. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the production mode of the production in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that the change is more likely to develop (change) the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect than the advance change. By doing so, it becomes easy to maintain the expectation of the player for a long period of time, and the expectation of the player can be climaxed in the fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the pre-variation may make it easier for the pre-reading zone effect to develop (develop) than the variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect effect effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the effect scenario of each look-ahead effect effect, and the selected look-ahead The effect scenario is associated with the effect effect, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect in the variation are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "blue effect" means that a blue effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and a blue effect sound effect is output, and the "red effect" means a blue effect around the effect symbol 70a. A red effect image with a higher expectation of a big hit than the image is displayed, and a red effect sound effect is output.

The look-ahead effect effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and a scenario in which the effect effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the effect during the effect is executed during the change (for example). , Scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the effect effect is executed during the pre-variation and the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is an effect scenario in which the effect effect effect mode does not progress (change) to an effect mode in which the expectation for executing a special game is high, and an effect effect effect effect mode. One point is that a staging scenario that progresses (changes) to a staging mode with a high degree of expectation for executing a special game is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the production mode of the effect effect progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the change is more likely to develop (change) the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect than the pre-variation. By doing so, it becomes easy to maintain the expectation of the player for a long period of time, and the expectation of the player can be climaxed in the fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the pre-variation may make it easier for the pre-reading effect effect to progress (develop) than the variation.

Further, as an effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect, an effect of a type that confirms the execution of the jackpot game (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect of a type that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the blue effect (for example, a white effect). ) May be provided.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E322-1, and in step E322-2, the notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect executed in the pre-reach effect period (during normal variation). The dialogue advance notice pattern is determined using the dialogue advance notice effect determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining. Specifically, the dialogue advance notice pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern with reference to the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34.

"Serif notice effect" suggests a jackpot expectation to the main display device 70 according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach effect period (normal fluctuation). This is a kind of jackpot notice effect in which the dialogue image is displayed and the audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. The dialogue notice effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-3, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this dialogue advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the dialogue advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub CPU 130a provides a character advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 35 (a)) for determining the advance notice pattern of the character advance notice effect executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). Use to determine the character notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the character advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35 (a), the character advance notice is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each character advance notice pattern. Determine the pattern.

The "feature notice effect" means that the first movable member 73a performs a predetermined operation (small descent or large descent, which will be described later) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach effect period (normal fluctuation) to obtain a jackpot expectation. It is one of the suggested jackpot notice productions.

In step E322-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the character advance notice effect according to the character advance notice pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of the character advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the character advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the character advance notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the blackout effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation effect pattern is such that the reach effect equal to or higher than the normal reach is executed. If the variable effect pattern is such that the blackout effect can be executed, the process is moved to step E322-7, and if the pattern is not the variable effect pattern in which the blackout effect can be executed, step E322 is assumed that the blackout effect is not executed. Move the process to -9.

The sub CPU 130a is black using the blackout effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35B) for determining the effect pattern of the blackout effect executed during the reach effect period (normal reach) in step E322-7. Determine the out effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the blackout effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35 (b), the blackout effect is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern. Determine the pattern.

The "blackout effect" means that the main display device 70 is darkened during the reach effect period (normal reach) and the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the darkening period. , It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which a development production suggesting whether or not to develop into an SP reach production is executed. The blackout effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed after the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the blackout effect according to the blackout effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this blackout effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the back cut-in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the SP reach effect is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute the back cut-in effect, the process is moved to step E322-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute the back cut-in effect, the back cut-in effect is not executed. The process is transferred to step E322-12.

The sub CPU 130a uses a back cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35 (c)) for determining an effect pattern of the back cut-in effect executed during the SP reach effect in step E322-10. Determine the in-effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the back cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35 (c), the back is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each back cut-in effect pattern. Determine the cut-in effect pattern.

The "back cut-in effect" is a development suggestion that suggests whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during the SP reach effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the production is executed. The back cut-in effect is a special button operation effect that does not execute the promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is not executed if the effect button 17 is not operated. There is.

In step E322-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the back cut-in effect corresponding to the back cut-in effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this back cut-in effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the back cut-in effect is executed. The details of the back cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the determined effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the SPSP reach effect is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E322-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute the determined effect, it is assumed that the determined effect is not executed and the process is set to step E322-15. Move the process.

In step E322-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the determined effect pattern using the determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35 (d)) for determining the effect pattern of the determined effect executed during the SPSP reach effect. .. Specifically, the decision effect pattern is determined with reference to the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35 (d), based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each decision effect pattern. do.

The "decision effect" is a result of suggesting (notifying) whether or not the jackpot game is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP reach effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the suggestion production is executed. The determined effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed after the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It has become so. Further, the deciding effect may be performed not only during the SPSP reach effect but also during the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, etc. In that case, the normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect may be performed in this order. It is advisable to increase the execution rate of the deciding effect.

Further, in the deciding effect, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered to the effect position (large lowering described later), and the second movable member 73b is moved in the left-right direction, so that the panel lighting device 10 and the like can be used. The lighting device 74 for the board, the effect button light emitting LED, etc. emit light in rainbow colors, and the success image (image including the rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, which suggests that the jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is executed by the success effect and the failure image (the image not including the rainbow color) is displayed on the main display device 70 without the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descending to the effect position. There is a decision failure production that suggests that it will not be done.

In step E322-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the determined effect according to the determined effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this decision effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the decision effect is executed. The details of the determination effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing a definite effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute the final effect, the process is moved to step E322-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute the final effect, it is assumed that the final effect is not executed. End the decision process.

In step E322-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the definite effect pattern using the definite effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36) for determining the effect pattern of the definite effect executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect. .. Specifically, the definite effect pattern is determined with reference to the definite pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36, based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each definite effect pattern.

The "fixed effect" is a big hit notice effect in which the firing handle 15 emits a rainbow color while a definite sound (cueinkyuin) that definitely notifies that a big hit is being executed is output during the execution of the variable effect that is a big hit. It is a kind of.

In step E322-17, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the definite effect according to the definite effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of the finalized effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the finalized effect is executed at various timings. The details of the finalized staging pattern determination table will be described later.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 34 is a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table for determining a dialogue advance notice pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The dialogue notice pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variation effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and an effect content (valid period, dialogue advance notice effect content) of each dialogue notice pattern. The serif notice pattern 01 is a serif notice pattern in which the serif notice effect is not executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue content column indicates that one of a plurality of normal dialogues for which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game may be executed is displayed in black characters. ..
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a plurality of chance lines suggesting that a jackpot game may be performed is displayed in black.
"Reach (black)" indicates that one reach line that confirms that the reach effect is executed is displayed in black characters.
"Reach (red)" indicates that one reach line that confirms that the reach effect is executed is displayed in red letters.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line indicating that the jackpot game is likely to be performed is displayed in red.
"Fever (gold)" indicates that one fiery line is displayed in gold letters, which suggests that the jackpot game is likely to be performed.
"Confirmation (rainbow)" indicates that one definite line that confirms that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in gold characters.

The jackpot expectation of each line is in the order of normal line <chance line <reach line (black letters) <reach line (red letters) <hot lines (red letters) <hot lines (gold letters) <confirmed lines (rainbow letters) It is set to be large in.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: weak for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates in intensity: medium for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each vibration is set so as to increase in the order of weak vibration <medium vibration <strong vibration.

(Character notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 35 (a) is a character advance notice pattern determination table for determining the character advance notice pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The character notice pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each character notice pattern, and the character notice content (execution timing, operation mode) of each character notice pattern. ing. The character advance notice pattern 01 is a character advance notice pattern in which the character advance notice effect is not executed.

The "small descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable staging device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position and then returns to the standby position.
"Large descent" means that the movable staging device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to the staging position below the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The jackpot expectation of each operation mode is set so as to increase in the order of small descent <large descent. Although the execution timing of the character advance notice effect is only at the start of the fluctuation, the character advance notice effect may be executed at other timings as well.

(Blackout production pattern determination table)
FIG. 35B is a blackout effect pattern determination table for determining a blackout effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot judgment result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect content (valid period, blackout effect content) of each blackout effect pattern. ing. The blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which the blackout effect is not executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

The "development failure" in the column of the effect image indicates that the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect fails and ends with the normal reach is executed.
The "weak development effect" indicates that the weak development effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
The "strong development effect" indicates that a weak development effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
“None” in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each staging image is set to increase in the order of development failure <weak development staging <strong staging staging.

(Back cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 35 (c) is a back cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining the back cut-in effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

In the back cut-in effect pattern determination table, the jackpot judgment result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each back cut-in effect pattern, and the effect content (valid period, cut-in effect content) of each back cut-in effect pattern are displayed. It is associated. The back cut-in effect pattern 01 is a back cut-in effect pattern in which the back cut-in effect is not executed.

"None" in the button image column indicates that the operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is not displayed during the valid period.
The "non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

The "weak cut-in" in the column of the effect image indicates that a weak cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
The "strong cut-in" indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that a jackpot game may be performed.
“None” in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each staging image is set so as to increase in the order of weak cut-in <strong cut-in.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 35D is a determination effect pattern determination table for determining the determination effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and an effect content (valid period, determined effect content) of each determined effect pattern. The deciding effect patterns 01 to 02 are deciding effect patterns in which the deciding failure effect is executed, and the deciding effect patterns 11 to 12 are deciding effect patterns in which the deciding success effect is executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The “protruding (white)” indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
The “protruding (rainbow)” indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light during the valid period is displayed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.
The “protruding (white)” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation-promoting light emission is performed in which white light is emitted.
The “protruding (rainbow)” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation-promoting light emission is performed.

The jackpot expectation of each button image and button state is set to increase in the order of non-projection (white) <projection (white) <projection (rainbow).

The "failed image" in the column of the effect image indicates that a determined failed image suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed (≈ lost) is displayed.
The "success image" indicates that a determined success image is displayed to notify that the jackpot game is executed.
“None” in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
“Yes (5 seconds)” indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for 5 seconds when the success image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

Even if the failed image is displayed, it may be notified that the revival effect is executed and the jackpot game is executed after that, so the display of the failed image does not mean that the game is lost. It has become.

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 36 is a definite effect pattern determination table for determining a definite effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The finalized effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each finalized effect pattern, and an execution timing of the finalized effect in each confirmed effect pattern. The definite effect pattern 01 is a definite effect pattern in which the definite effect is not executed. It should be noted that the shaded part in the column of the execution timing of the final staging (for example, the hatched part in the column of (for example, at the start of the normal reach of the (super) shortened fluctuation line, during the staging, effective 2, development staging, etc.)) is applicable. It is an effect content that is not executed (does not exist) in the variable effect pattern.

Further, "effective 1" in the column of the execution timing of the finalized effect indicates the effective period in the dialogue advance notice effect that may be executed during the normal fluctuation (pre-reach effect).
“Effective 2” indicates the effective period in the blackout effect that may be executed during the normal reach effect.
“Effective 3” indicates the effective period in the back cut-in effect that may be executed during the SP reach effect.
“Effective 4” indicates the effective period in the determined effect executed during the SPSP reach effect.
“○” indicates the timing at which the finalized effect is executed.

The first feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable effect, a successful decision effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed after the execution of the final effect (after the output of the final sound). (The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate), and the decision success effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed without executing the final effect (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a). There are cases where the movable member 73b operates). By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a feeling of excitement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is the SP reach variation effect in which the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, and the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect and then the SPSP reach. The execution mode (execution ratio, execution timing) of the finalized effect is different from the SPSP reach variable effect in which the effect is executed, and the finalized effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect. There is a point that the final production is not executed during the valid period of the accompanying big hit notice production (line notice production, blackout production, back cut-in production, decision production). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the final effect is executed when the effect button 17 is to be operated and the motivation to operate the effect button 17 is lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The third feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable effect, the effect button 17 is operated depending on whether the first movable member 73a operates or does not operate due to the character advance notice effect. The execution mode of the jackpot notice effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, decision effect) and the execution ratio of the final effect are different, and the final effect can be executed at multiple timings during the variable effect. , The final effect is not executed during the valid period of the above-mentioned jackpot advance notice effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, decision effect). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the final effect is executed when the effect button 17 is to be operated and the motivation to operate the effect button 17 is lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

In addition, among the above-mentioned jackpot notice effects (line notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, decision effect), the final effect will be executed during the valid period of the back cut-in effect where the operation promotion effect is not executed. You may do it.

The fourth feature of the staging using the tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable staging, the definite staging can be executed before the decisive staging is executed, and the dialogue notice staging with a low jackpot expectation is made. There is a point that it is easier to execute the bonus notice effect for operating the first movable member 73a when the dialogue notice effect with a high expectation of big hit is executed than when is executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the character advance notice effect may be executed not only at the start of the variable effect but also at the start of the reach effect, or may be executed at the timing between the start of the variable effect and the start of the reach effect. In this case, it is advisable to determine at what timing the character advance notice effect is executed by lottery (character advance notice pattern).

The fifth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable effect that is a big hit, the reach effect is in progress rather than the case where the effective period (valid period of the dialogue notice) occurs before the reach effect. There is a point that the effect button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when the effective period (effective period of the determined effect) occurs. By doing so, it becomes easier to raise the expectation of the player during the reach production than before the reach production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not in the protruding state during the valid period of the dialogue advance notice effect executed before the reach effect, the effect button 17 is in the protruding state at a rate lower than the valid period of the determined effect. You may do so. In this case, the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a predetermined ratio only when a big hit occurs, or the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a big hit when a loss occurs. You may do it.

The sixth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that the blackout effect executed during the first period of the reach effect (during the normal reach effect) is later than the first period of the reach effect. There is a point that the ratio of the effect button 17 to be in the protruding state during the effective period is higher in the determined effect executed during the second period (during the SPSP reach effect). By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the second period after the first period of the reach production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect button 17 does not protrude during the effective period of the blackout effect executed in the first period of the reach effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a rate lower than the effective period of the determined effect. It may be in a state. In this case, the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state only when a big hit occurs, or the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a big hit when a loss occurs. good.

A seventh feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that the jackpot advance notice effect that can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect is a specific effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. The first effect that can be executed at multiple timings during the variable effect and is executed by the operation of the effect button 17, including (line notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, and decision effect). (Back cut-in effect) and the second effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, decision effect) that is executed without operating the effect button 17, and the specific reach variation effect (SP reach variation effect) The execution of the first effect is restricted at another timing (from the start of fluctuation to the start of the SP reach effect) before the execution timing of the specific effect during execution. By doing so, it is possible to improve the staging effect in the specific reach staging, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as the above-mentioned specific effect, the operation of the effect button 17 such as the back cut-in effect is performed separately from the operation non-requested effect that is executed without the operation of the effect button 17 such as the seri notice effect and the decision effect. An operation request effect that cannot be executed without it is further provided, and another timing (for example, the development effect is in progress) before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect such as the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect that develop from the normal reach effect is decided. Before the execution of the effect), the operation request effect is restricted from being executed, and when the variable effect is a big hit (a command to specify a variable effect pattern that is a big hit is received), the specific effect during the execution of the development effect is specified. It may be possible to execute a specific effect as an operation request effect at another timing before the execution timing of. Further, the execution of the operation request effect may be restricted by a predetermined lottery at another timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect.

The eighth feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is a plurality of line advance notice effects having different effect modes (line contents, button vibration mode), and the second jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player. When (full rotation reach effect) is executed, the line advance notice effect of a special mode (the intense heat (gold) of the line advance notice pattern 7) may be executed, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second big hit game. When one big hit game (SPSP reach effect) is executed, there is a point that the special aspect of the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the second big hit game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the control CPU 141a.

First, the integrated CPU 141a prohibits all interruptions in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial settings such as built-in register settings, access permission to the central RAM 141c, initialization of the entire RWM area of the central RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. ), Etc., and in step T3, all interruptions are permitted.

The control CPU 141a performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) and display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. ) Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight, and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the amount of light). Is performed to switch the initial value (any of 0 to 5), the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the light intensity value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5).

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed if the gaming machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is started).

The control CPU 141a performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, it is output from the voice output device 9 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The control CPU 141a performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the display device (main display device 70) is based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. , Sub-display device 71) performs processing for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a). .. Further, between the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and the time when the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, the setting confirmation mode, and various types of the board unit 500. An important (high security level) abnormality (power supply) that should be notified in preference to a dish full error or a payout error until the timer interruption is started on the main control board 110 during the initial operation of the drive source. It is regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound) of turning on, power restoration, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various effect sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction.

The control CPU 141a performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub-display device 71) is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The general CPU 141a performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

The general CPU 141a performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) is set in the control RAM 141c. do. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag sets the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed) is controlled by the control unit 141. Is set by the V blank interrupt process that is executed every time it is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The control CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the control RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71) will be performed. That is, the frame update timing is the start timing or end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot advance notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. It has become like. The frame is updated for the effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 m and the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84, and the effect operation of the movable effect device 73). It may match the timing, or it may not match the frame update timing.

The control CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variation effect and at the end of the variation effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can operate it. Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification (output of the notification sound) of the door opening error), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 which can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 which can be operated by the player. Is now regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various effect sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various staging sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the notification of abnormality (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
FIG. 38 will be used to explain the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit 150. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a performs the origin return processing of the accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. 1 ”is set.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, the return operation of the accessory (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, and the initial processing number is set to "2". Perform processing such as setting to. The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 38, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 38, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (movable staging device 73, sub-display device 71) is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target for returning to the origin is movable in step R105-2. It is set in the effect device 73, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the sub display device 71, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

The lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-6, and the board accessory in step R105-7. Does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time. Updates the board accessory abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return error has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value. Moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-display device 71 is driven, and the board bonus processing number is "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable staging device 73, sub-display device 71) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-20.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R105-13 whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

The lamp CPU 150a drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position in step R105-14, and the effect button 17 is within a predetermined time in step R105-15. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. The origin return processing of is finished.

The lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c in step R105-17, and clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer in step R105-18.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-22. Set "2" and end the origin return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 39, when the movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71 whose effect positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on are not at the origin position (standby position), Both are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (in the order of the movable staging device 73 → the sub display device 71) without returning to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the movable staging device 73 and the sub-display device 71 are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent both of the accessories from exerting a load on each other, which is inconvenient such that both accessories are damaged at the same time. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, the return operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin position are performed. It is possible to execute the return operation at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, the return operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin position are performed. When both of the return operations are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories. ..

The movable staging device 73 and the sub display device 71 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (in the order of the movable staging device 73 → the sub display device 71), but at the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position is performed. You may want to start. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable staging device 73 and the sub-display device 71, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 41 (a)) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a), from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine one initial motion pattern.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the processes, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 41B) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b), one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command. ..

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, the initial operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are simultaneously performed (the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17)). It is feasible at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, when the movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71 constituting the board accessory have a return abnormality, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71 is performed. Is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the staging button 17 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the staging button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, when both the initial operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is finished at. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is such that the other performs the effect operation. It disappears.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 41A is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table for determining an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

"Movable staging device small descent" is an operation in which the movable staging device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and "movable staging device large descent" is an operation. The movable staging device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to the staging position below the intermediate position, and "returning to the origin of the movable staging device" means that the movable staging device 73 returns to the standby position. It has become.

"Move sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "return to the origin of the sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 returns to the standby position. It has become.

The "movable effect device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided in the movable effect device 73, and the "sub display device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub display device 71. Is.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73a. This is because the LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described, but in this respect, the sub display device LED is caused by the return abnormality of the sub display device 71. This is because it flashes red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. It can be mentioned that the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of one of the movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the movable effect device 73 may be different. And the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of both the sub-display device 71 may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, when the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the movable staging device 73 and / or the sub display device 71 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the initial operation when the power is turned on. It is also possible to execute an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or to execute an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration in the initial operation at the time of turning on the power. By doing so, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that the board accessory (movable staging device 73,) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that the initial light emission of the movable staging device LED is emitted when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While the modes are the same, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that while the initial light emission mode of the movable staging device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable staging device LED differs between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED. The embodiments may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable staging device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. .. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that when the power is turned on, when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable staging device 73, sub-display device 71). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that it is restored at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. There is a point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the panel accessory (movable staging device 73, sub-display device 71) differs from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as when the power supply is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is that the movable staging device 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the sub display device 71, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable staging device 73, and the movable staging device 73 returns to the sub display device 71 without a return abnormality. When there is an abnormality, the initial operation of the movable staging device 73 is performed and the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 41B is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of command at power ON and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "effect button large rise" is an operation in which the effect button 17 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and the "effect button origin return" means that the effect button 17 is in the standby position. It is an operation to return to.

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41B is that the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the operation is made to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. The point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation is different can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that when the power is turned on, when the special symbol is variable, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the number of emission colors in the above is different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 at the time of turning on the power is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in the emission color in is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is effective during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the effect button 17 during the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. One point is that the effect button 17 is overlaid with the initial operation for detecting whether or not the effect button 17. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated during the setting change.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable staging device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also completed. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of normal figure hold, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable staging device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Setting change notification for (RWM clear preparation notification for prompting RWM clear preparation and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification for setting confirmation and setting confirmation notification for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode). It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation time of various drive sources is immediately before elapse. Since the operation of various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and it may be confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable staging device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second prize opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is displayed) until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine. Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this embodiment, "during the initial operation of the drive source" or "check the operation of the solenoid" that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change notification, the RWM clear preparation notification, and the setting confirmation notification. Etc. were not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Modification example when various drive sources are initially operated)
Hereinafter, a modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification is different from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and have them check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even if the state is before the start of the game progress control, the result of the game is affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since various drive sources for operating the given movable body are initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , It is possible to properly check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since the operation is started, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is completed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the number (shortening the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable staging device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second prize opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the machine collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. However, by not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

(Display example of special symbol display)
A display example of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the special symbol display shows a lost special symbol in which the LED at the right end is lit as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the display mode is such that the two LEDs are lit from the left end, and after that (after 32 ms), FIGS. 48 (c) to (h). ), The lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of timer interruption, and by continuing this for 8 times of timer interrupt, the same LED is turned on for 32 ms.

Then, cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times with the change in the display mode of FIGS. 48 (b) to (h) as one cycle (= 256 ms), and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, FIGS. 48 (i) to (l). ) (Loss special symbol, 1st jackpot special symbol, 2nd jackpot special symbol, 3rd jackpot special symbol) is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Further, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started after the stop time has elapsed, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times from the display mode of FIG. 48 (b), and any one of FIGS. 48 (i) to (l). The special symbol of is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle fluctuation, two LEDs are turned on and the lighting position is changed (moved). However, one LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed, or three or more LEDs may be turned on. The LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed.

Further, in the cycle variation, eight types of display modes are set as one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all turning off) may be set as one cycle, and three or more types of display modes may be set as one cycle. May be good. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the variable winning portion is opened for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but in the case of executing the small hit game, after performing the cycle fluctuation a plurality of times. It is advisable to stop and display the small hit special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Example of production for each production mode)
An example of a display effect for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

In the effect mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The staging symbol 70a is displayed in the first mode (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, numerical image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special symbol TZ is in a common mode (numerical image) common to all staging modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the first aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.75 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first mode (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first aspect causes the main display device 70 to perform a swaying motion (directing motion) in which the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) is changed to the first posture again via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The staging symbol 70a is displayed in the second mode (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, numerical image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special symbol TZ is a common mode (numerical image) common to all staging modes. Is displayed.

The effect symbol 70a of the second aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update operation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle type). Then, the normal icon of the second aspect causes the main display device 70 to perform a swaying motion (directing motion) that becomes the first posture again from the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the third mode (R-chafted rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by R-chafted hexagonal image), and the special symbol TZ is common to all effect modes. It is displayed in the common mode (numerical image) of.

The effect symbol 70a of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the effect symbol 70a is enlarged and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update variation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), if it is a normal icon, it is displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode D (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode E (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode F (time saving game state), as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. It is designed to last for 4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

When a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C) in the effect modes A to F, the special icon is a common mode common to all the effect modes (the second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C). It is displayed as a circle). Then, the special icon of the common mode is a rotation operation (directing operation) in which the specific part rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the upper part and becomes the first posture again via the second posture in which the specific part moves. ) Is always repeated in one cycle of 2.5 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

Further, in the effect modes A to F, the special symbol TZ displayed in the common mode (numerical image) is scrolled downward (update variation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the variation effect. Therefore, the update operation of repeatedly updating the numerical images 1 to 9 is repeated in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. As for the special symbol TZ, it is suggested that the variation effect is being executed by performing the update variation.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) of the hold icon is performed by the LED on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It is repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the change cycle (32 ms) of the lighting mode or the cycle of one cycle (256 ms). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, the blinking cycle of the LED on the sub-first variable display 81 (sub-second variable display 82) is such that the hold icon changes to the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation). It is designed to be repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

Further, in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a is configured to execute any of a plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, the effect of the variable effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the time until the effect symbol 70a scrolls (updates and changes) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect. There are cases. Therefore, the effect of the variable effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, regardless of which of the plurality of types of pre-variation movements (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update) of the three effect symbols 70a. The start order of (variation) may be the same (left → middle → right).

Further, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect, the pre-change operation and scroll display (update variation) of the three effect symbols 70a are performed. The starting order may be different (floating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, reduced display: right → middle → left, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-variation operation modes of the effect symbol 70a may be provided for each effect mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the hold icon may be one type for each effect mode so as not to have a big hit expectation.

(Example of displaying the number of pending items)
An example of displaying the number of holdings in the main display device 70 will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

First, when the number of holds is "0" and the customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C and the icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and the first hold number. “0” is displayed in the display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB, respectively.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "1", it is normally displayed on the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 50 (b). The hold icon HI of the embodiment is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animation of one frame, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in a non-animation of one frame. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the staging operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the number of first hold is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the hold displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C is as shown in FIG. 50 (c). A 20-frame animation that shifts the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C (decrease display, change display) is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is set to "0" by one frame of non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the hold icon HI changes from opaque to transparent and is displayed semi-transparently, but the staging operation (shaking operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and is opaque, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is performed. ) Is continued.

In this state, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 50 (e), the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the held number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display) in a non-animation of 1 frame. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size. That is, in the state where the special symbol is variablely displayed, the hold icon HI may not be displayed from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 50 (f). And the staging operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "2", and it is determined that the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (g). A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI of the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) is started in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the hold number display area SA of the first hold icon display area SA is started. The reserved number is updated (increased) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI additionally displayed has an effect operation (rotational operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the upper part. It starts and is magnified from the semi-transparent tiny size to the normal size with the effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) is completed, the hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) additionally displayed is displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (h). It is a normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the staging operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, it is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 50 (j). A 20-frame animation that shifts (decreases) one hold icon HI toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" by one frame of non-animation. (Reduced display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the staging operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two hold icon HIs is completed, as shown in FIG. 50 (k), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B is the corresponding hold icon HI. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the hold icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI of the first special display mode displayed on the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed on the first display portion in a normal size and opaquely, and the icon changes accordingly. The effect changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon), but the effect operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 50 (l), the second display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the held number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "2" (increased display) in a non-animation of 1 frame. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 50 (m). And the staging operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 50 (n), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of the first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 50 (o). A 20-frame animation of shifting (decreasing display) the two operating hold icon HIs toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is a non-animation of 1 frame. 1 ”is updated (decreased display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the staging operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 50 (p), the main display device 70 has a shield image (blackout image, whiteout image) on the entire screen. Etc.) is displayed, and the icons of the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C can be visually recognized while the hold numbers of the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB are visible. Be regulated.

Then, in the rear layer of the shielded image, as shown in FIG. 50 (q), the hold icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the effect mode B while the display mode and the effect operation (rotation operation) of the icon TI are maintained. It is switched to the hold icon HI of the mode. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the staging operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the shielded image is erased, as shown in FIG. 50 (r), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the second held icon display area 70C displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI in the special display mode can be visually recognized.

Even when a plurality of hold icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same manner as when the effect operation is performed so that the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode are synchronized with each other. The effect operation is performed so that the plurality of hold icons of the mode are synchronized.

Further, although the example of the hold display in the effect mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the hold icon and the operation effect mode are different in the other effect modes, and basically the same number of hold displays (effect) is displayed. (Including the display when switching modes) will be performed.

The first feature of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold numbers and hold icons are not animated. The point is that the increase display is executed in the period of one frame which is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and decrease display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when the number of hold numbers decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the hold numbers are displayed as a decrease due to non-animation (1 frame). Further, the change display (decrease display) by the animation (20 frames) of the hold icon to the icon is executed (started at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing when the decrease display of the hold number starts (frame update timing) rather than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) starts (frame update timing). It may be ahead (for example, one frame before).

The third feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) is completed. However, the timing at which the reduction display of the reserved number is completed (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of holds has decreased due to the hold number while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) is completed (frame update timing). (For example, one frame before) may be set.

The fourth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when the number of holdings increases during the variable display of the special symbol, the holding number is increased by non-animation (1 frame) and the holding icon. The point is that the increase display by the animation (20 frames) of is executed (starts at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing at which the increase display of the hold number starts (frame update timing) and the timing at which the increase display of the hold number ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing at which the increase display of the hold icon starts (frame update timing) (for example, one frame before). ) May be.

The fifth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the increase display of the hold number is completed rather than the timing (frame update timing) when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon is completed. There is a point that the timing of becoming (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of holds has increased due to the hold number, while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when the number of holds increases during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol, the number of holds increases while the customer is waiting. Therefore, the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon is executed for a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is the effect operation mode (operation while enlarging) at the start (display start) of the increase display of the hold icon, and the completion (display) of the increase display of the hold icon. There is a point that it is different (partially different) from the effect operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only a part of the operations may be different but all the operations may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The eighth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is a display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the increase display of the hold icon and a display mode (opaque) after the completion of the increase display of the hold icon. There are some differences (some are different). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The ninth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is the effect operation in which the hold icon and the icon are repeatedly changed into the first posture and the second posture during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) (the effect operation). It is possible to perform shaking motion, rotation motion, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by the hold icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the hold icon and the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) in which the icon repeatedly changes between the first posture and the second posture are performed from the first posture. The point that the time for changing to the second posture is constant each time is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the hold icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. If the hold icon and the icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the control load of the drawing process is large and the processing fails (drawing for one frame could not be performed), the drawing process is started from the first posture. The time for changing to the second posture is not constant but substantially constant only at that time.

The eleventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is a plurality of icons (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode during the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol. The point is that the effect operation is executed in synchronization with each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the appearance of the effect of the icon and improve the effect of the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display, or a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. It may be time, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

The twelfth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, the next The hold icon has a point that the effect operation is repeatedly executed until the variation display (variation effect) is started. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the number of holds is not "0" by the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the transparency of the effect symbol does not change when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the icon is erased after the transparency of the icon becomes high. There are some points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when erasing the icon and to erase the icon naturally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon) is the first effect mode and the second effect mode (effect). It can be mentioned that the mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50, the cycle in which the hold icon (the icon) changes from the first posture to the first posture again via the second posture is defined as the first effect mode. The point that it is the same as the second effect mode (between the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F) can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the size (area) of the area where the number of holds is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease of the number of holds in the hold number display area, but in the hold icon display area. The size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes depending on the increase or decrease in the number of holds (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple. The hold icon is displayed in the second area, which is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the increase / decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 17th feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50, the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) performs an effect operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture in the first cycle. The hold icon displayed in the special display mode (special icon), which can be repeatedly executed in (2 seconds or 3 seconds) and has a higher expectation of big hit than the normal display mode, changes between the first posture and the second posture. There is a point that the effecting operation can be repeatedly executed in the second cycle (2.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it becomes easy to distinguish between the hold icon in the normal display mode and the hold icon in the special display mode, and it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the special symbol executes the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) from 1 to 9 of the numerical image in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the hold icon has a point that the effect operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture can be executed in the second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the update fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect operation of the hold icon are linked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50, a decrease display of the number of holds is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the hold displayed in the hold number display area in this decrease display is performed. The number does not move, but the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area moves (before the hold number decreased, the hold icon was displayed in the second area larger than the first area, and the hold number decreased. After that, the hold icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the decrease in the number of holds while recognizing the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is the movement direction (downward) in the update operation of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the operation direction (left-right direction) in the effect operation (swaying operation) of the hold icon. Etc.) and different points. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the update fluctuation of the production symbol (special symbol) and the production operation (swaying operation) of the hold icon, and it is possible to enhance the production effect in the fluctuation production. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, when the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold icon is increased and displayed in one frame without animation, but the hold number is increased. It may be increased and displayed by animation of a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a longer period of time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon is set to perform the effect operation even while the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the hold icon stops the effect operation while the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the effect operation is performed. The effect operation of the hold icon may be restarted after the shift display of the hold icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of holds). By doing so, it is possible to make the player know whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on the presence or absence of the effect operation of the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect operation of the hold icon is restarted after the shift display of the hold icon, the hold icon may resume the effect operation from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (hold icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbol has been newly started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the effect operation, but the stop display of the special symbol (effect symbol) produces the effect. The operation may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load related to the display control.

In addition, although multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the effect operation, the effect operation is not performed in perfect synchronization. , The staging operation may be performed substantially in synchronization. It should be noted that the timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is substantially synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display or at a predetermined time from the start of the display. It may be at the lapse of time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

(Specific example when variable staging starts from waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect starts from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

51 is a timing chart when the variation effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 52 to 53 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 51. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 51, there is a customer waiting state in which the variation display of the special symbol has not been executed since the power was turned on, and the effect mode A and the volume value “3” are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 60 displays the lost special symbol (only the LED at the right end is lit), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the main display device 70 waits for the execution of the variation effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation), and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are in a state of being stopped and displayed as the initial symbol "135" when the power is turned on (the effect operation). See FIG. 52 (a)). The mode A background image is side-scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 51, when the up button or the down button of the cross key 19 is operated for volume adjustment, a part of the main display device 70 overlaps the front side of the right effect symbol 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value “3” is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value “3” (see FIG. 52 (b)). ).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 51, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to raise the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the voice output device 9 emits a confirmation sound (0.5 seconds) of the volume corresponding to the volume value "4". It is output (see FIG. 52 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 51, when an operation for lowering the volume is performed by the changeover switch 22, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but the audio output device 9 responds to the volume value "3" because the volume is adjusted by the changeover switch 22. No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 52 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 51, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "1" and the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1". A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the staging control board 130 (see FIG. 52 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 51, when the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, a start command (special symbol) is given from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed as "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol (FIG. 52 (f)). reference).

Further, since a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "1", and the first hold icon display area is displayed. The hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed on the first display unit of the 70B in a non-animated manner, and the output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 52 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 51 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area The SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 are displayed as “0”, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 53 (g)).

Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the staging symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the variable BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (FIG. 53 (FIG. 53). g) See).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of the ascending display as the pre-variation operation of the staging symbol 70a, the variation start sound (start sound output every variation, start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 51 (at the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 53 (h)), and the timing of T8 in FIG. 51 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation). ), When the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, and then the scroll display (update variation) of the staging symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 53 (i)). At the timing of T9, high-speed fluctuations of all the effect symbols 70a start (see FIG. 53 (j)). When outputting the fluctuation start sound, it is preferable to end the output of the fluctuation start sound at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends).

If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command during the display of the volume value image OG, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the variation effect is not executed, so that the volume value image is displayed. The display period is extended without erasing the OG, and the state in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained.

Also, when the light intensity value image is displayed by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, it is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period during which the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19), the volume adjustment and the light amount by the cross key 19 are performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are being regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of starting the fluctuation effect by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Is regulated (erased). Therefore, the fluctuation effect is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, even if the volume value is adjusted by the operation of the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed, but if the volume value image OG is being displayed, the cross key 19 is operated. Regardless of whether the volume is adjusted or the volume is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) and then starts the scroll display (update display), but the special symbol TZ is updated without performing the pre-variation operation. (Scroll display, switching display) is started. Therefore, the effect of the variation effect can be enhanced by the pre-variation operation of the effect symbol 70a, and the player can be made aware that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol TZ. It will be possible to improve.

Further, in the variation effect, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variable display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84) is updated according to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variation effect, the shift display (change to the icon TI) of the hold icon is started before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, the player can detect that the reserved memory has decreased at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, the shift display (change to the icon TI) of the hold icon ends. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game in which the variable effect (scroll display of the effect symbol 70a) is performed by reducing the reserved memory, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update fluctuation) (during the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and during the operation before the change), the hold icon HI now performs the effect operation (sway operation, rotation operation). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the staging effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a, the icon TI performs the effect operation (sway operation, rotation operation). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable effect is started by turning the player's eyes to the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect symbol 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is also produced (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling, Scene changes, movements of characters included in the background image, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is included in the effect operation (horizontal scroll, scene change, background image). The movement of the character to be performed, etc.) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) starts at the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect symbol 70a. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, at the start of the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a, the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) is already audibly output. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect even before the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , After the end timing of the first cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (2 to 3 cycle fluctuations). After the start timing and before the start timing of the fourth cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the end of the first cycle variation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started. It has become like. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbol and the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a in stages, the effect of the game effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the staging symbol 70a has a subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. It will be possible.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the special symbol TZ update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) match, the start timing of the special symbol variation display is the special symbol TZ update fluctuation ( It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of scroll display and switching display).

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the update fluctuation (scroll display) of the special symbol TZ is started. , Switching display) is started, that is, it is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden are reduced. Is possible. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the special symbol TZ is in the subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84) Updates are started, that is, they are intentionally started out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84). The update of the LED hold display) is started. Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations with the update start timing of the hold display, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the update start timing of the hold display. It becomes possible.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is started, the hold display (on the main display device 70). The update of the hold icon, the hold number, and the LED hold display on the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84) is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. .. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold display has been updated since the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the start time of the shift display of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI is terminated after the end of the first cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted and displayed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. Become.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI match, the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is set to the icon TI of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of the shift display.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is completed, the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is finished. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). , After the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the audible output of the predetermined game sound (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start without intentionally synchronizing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). The audible output of a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started before the end timing of the second cycle variation. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , The start timing of the first cycle fluctuation is also later), and the audible output of the staging BGM (variable BGM for each staging mode) is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the staging BGM becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the staging BGM (variable BGM for each staging mode) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the audible output of the staging BGM match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the staging BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (the display start of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) starts. That is, they are intentionally started out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (on the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the start of display, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image), etc. ) Is to be started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, before the start of the first cycle fluctuation (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), The effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variation effect, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update display). The number of cycle fluctuations executed by the vessel 61) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variation effect, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update display). The number of display changes in the cycle fluctuation executed by the device 61) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the variable effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the effect symbol 70a instead of hiding the volume value image OG. By changing to the state of being displayed (set) on the lower layer of, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by displaying the effect symbol 70a so as to overlap the rear of the effect symbol 70a.

(Specific example when starting a prize during variable production)
A specific example of a start winning prize during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 55.

FIG. 54 is a timing chart in the case of starting and winning a prize during the variation effect, and FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 54. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 54, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Yth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is displayed and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 55 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 54, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "1" and the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1". A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the staging control board 130 (see FIG. 55 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 54, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold indicator 83 display "1". Become. Further, the additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode to the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B by animation and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 55 (c)). reference).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 54, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 55 (d)).

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is executed over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and outputs the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the fluctuation effect by the winning sound and improve the fun of the game.

(Specific example when continuously performing variable effect)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

FIG. 56 is a timing chart when the variation effect is continuously executed, and FIGS. 57 to 58 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 56. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 56, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, the left and right staging symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central staging symbol 70a is scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled). Display, switching display). Further, the first hold icon display area 70B displays two hold icon HIs in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, so that the variable BGM is displayed. It is audibly output (see FIG. 57 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 56 (at the start of the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the central effect symbol 70a that was scroll-displayed (updated fluctuation) temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 temporarily stops. The sound output is started, the character of the central effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a pre-stop operation that shakes the head), and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 57 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 56 (during N + second cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 57 (c)). ..

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 56, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 57 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 56, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started (. See FIG. 57 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 56, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 57 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 56, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 58 (g). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 56 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “1”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 58 (h)).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 58 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 56 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect effect executed only by the current variation effect is started, and the effect is produced. A blue effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 70a (see FIG. 58 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 56 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI ends, the first hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). .. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 58 (i)).

In this way, the variable BGM that was audibly output before the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the staging symbol 70a (during the stop display of the staging symbol 70a) is being output even during the execution of the pre-variation operation. It is designed to continuously (uninterruptedly) audibly output. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a plurality of variable effects were spun, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon display mode is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but the icon shift. The display mode of the icon is changed at the time of completion (after). Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the display mode of the icon conspicuous and enhance the effect of the icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable effect, the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a (for example, the effect symbol 70a on the left side) that is temporarily stopped first depending on the type of the variable effect pattern is performing the pre-stop effect, the effect symbol 70a that temporarily stops next (for example, the effect symbol 70a on the right side) is performed. ) May be performing the pre-stop effect and the update fluctuation (scroll display). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game. The effect pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped first and the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped next have the same effect mode as the effect before the stop, but may be different. Further, in the case of shortened fluctuation, the staging between stops may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 (sub first variation indicator 81) are completed. 2 The fluctuation display (update fluctuation) of the fluctuation display 82) is terminated. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the disappearance display of the icon is started. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. It has become like. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 (sub-first) 2 The variation display (update variation) of the variation display 82) ends, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character shaking the head) is executed, but the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed without executing the pre-stop effect. Therefore, the effect of the variable effect can be enhanced by the effect symbol 70a, and the player can be made aware of the end of the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol TZ, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a performs a pre-stop operation (an action in which the character shakes its head) and then displays a stop. However, even during the pre-stop operation or the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the background image (each). The background image corresponding to the effect mode) is designed to continuously execute the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, but the effect symbol 70a and the special Even during the stop display of the symbol TZ, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode) continuously executes the effect operation. Therefore, even after the staging symbol 70A or the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (before and the last timing of the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). Before the end timing of the cycle fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, and after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a predetermined mode (temporary stop display, stop display). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, the staging symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed before the final cycle fluctuation in the case of displaying the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61) is completed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game in which the variable display of the special symbol ends after the staging symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation and the last) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). After the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the stop display of the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, the last in the case where the hold icon HI is operated (swaying operation, rotation operation) during the execution of the variation effect and the change display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Even after the end of the cycle fluctuation of, the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continuously performed. Therefore, the hold icon HI makes it possible for the player to know that the number of holds is not "0" and does not give the player a feeling of boredom even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation and the last) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). After the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, after the cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the icon TI is deleted because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). The audible output of (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is output at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation). , It is possible to finish after the stop display timing of the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It is possible to end the audible output (temporary stop sound, etc.) before the cycle fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being dragged to the next variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) output before the last cycle fluctuation in the case of displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is output. It is possible to continuously output audible sound even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene) of the background image that was output before the last cycle fluctuation in the case where the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Changes, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variation effect is executed after the end of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbol. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example when the variable effect is started without receiving the stop command normally)
A specific example of a case where the variation effect is started without normally receiving the stop command will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started without normally receiving the stop command, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 59. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 59 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 56, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T3 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T3 in FIG. 59, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 60 (d)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, etc. should be started at the timing of T4 in FIG. 59, but the effect symbol 70a should be started. And the stop display of the special symbol TZ, etc. will not be started, and the fluctuation display period on the sub-first variation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, and the variation display period of the special symbol TZ. Will be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 59, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is started (FIG. 60 (e). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 59 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “0”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started from the first (off) (see FIG. 60 (f)).

Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased by non-animation, and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. Further, after the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variation effect is started is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment, the ascending display as the operation before the change is started, and the special symbol that has been scrolled (updated and changed) is started. The scroll display is continued without the TZ being stopped and displayed (see FIG. 60 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 59 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 60 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. When the third command (the command at the time of the next start) is received in the state where the current variation effect is not set, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (next start command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the previous variation effect ends during the execution of the next variation effect. Therefore, by starting the next variable effect, it is possible to appropriately end the previous variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if a start command is received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command was normally received). (In the embodiment), the variable effect (here, the floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable effect can be started in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, and the game when the variable effect is started from the state where the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the person and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a shorter time than the non-animation, that is, the erase display in the animation. Therefore, when the hold icon HI next shifts to the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not obstructed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the staging effect.

If the start command is received by the staging control board 130 in a state where the command is garbled due to wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where the variation effect (specifically, the SP reach effect) is executed, and the next start is performed in this state. When the hour command is received, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

FIG. 61 is a timing chart when the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state, and FIGS. 62 to 63 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 61. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 61, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the left and right staging symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central staging symbol 70a is scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled). Display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output. Further, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap the front side of the right effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 62 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 61 (during the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the central effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated and displayed) temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 emits a temporary stop sound. The output is started, and the character of the central effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a motion before the stop that shakes the head), and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 62 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 61 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated for volume adjustment, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the voice output device 9 starts outputting the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" ( See FIG. 62 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 61 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 62 (d)). ..

Next, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4 in FIG. 61 (during the N + second cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the stop command (symbol confirmation) from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Command) is sent. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 62 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 61, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started. .. Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the output of the confirmation sound continues (see FIG. 62 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 61, the output of the confirmation sound ends when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses (see FIG. 63 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 61, the icon TI disappears in the animation. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display, the erase display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 63 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 61, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the waiting period is set to the customer waiting state and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 waits for the customer from the effect control board 130. A status specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 61, when the stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 63 (i)). (See), when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

If the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) corresponding to the reception of the stop command is performed during the output of the confirmation sound, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound is output. The output is continued until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the case at the start of the variable effect, and the start command is received during the output of the confirmation sound. Even when the execution of the corresponding variation effect is started, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

In addition, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) when a predetermined period elapses after receiving the customer waiting state specification command, but if the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variable BGM is changed. The audible output is not stopped, and for example, when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute).

In this way, when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed during the variable effect (the period during which the volume can be adjusted or the amount of light can be adjusted with the cross key 19), the volume can be adjusted with the cross key 19 for a predetermined period (1 second). Light intensity adjustment is now regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of the stop display of the staging symbol 70a by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. In order to ensure the visibility of 70a, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the visibility of the staging symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed by the volume value image OG is not hindered, and the player can confirm the staging symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed, which can improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, when the variable effect starts or the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound is output during the output period (0. The output is continued until 5 seconds) elapses. Therefore, the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state, the audible output of the fluctuation BGM is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, compared to the case where the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (mute) immediately after the normal fluctuating effect is completed, it is less likely that the player is willing to stop the game, and the operation of the gaming machine is improved. Is possible.

Further, in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then stops and displays, but the audible output of the effect BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) continues even during the pre-stop operation or stop display of the effect symbol 70a. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a or during the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, but the effect symbol 70a and the special Even after the symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, the audible output of the effect BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the normal variation effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after performing a pre-stop operation (a motion in which the character shakes the head), but when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the effect BGM (for each effect mode) is displayed. The audible output of BGM) is stopped. Therefore, since the audible output of the staging BGM is continued for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then the stop display is displayed. However, even during the pre-stop operation of the effect symbol 70a, the player can adjust the volume of the output BGM during output by operating the cross key 19. Is adjustable. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player for adjusting the volume of the staging BGM, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the notification sounds of various errors are output during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a, the output of the effect BGM is limited (volume reduction or mute).

When the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the effect symbol 70a. It may be changed to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the symbol 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the effect symbol 70a, so that the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the effect symbol 70a is ensured and the display is stopped. The player can confirm the effect symbol 70a.

In addition, the volume confirmation sound is output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound is not output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect. , The volume confirmation sound may not be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect. ..

Further, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by the operation of the cross key 19 regardless of whether the customer is waiting or the variable effect is being produced. However, the operation of the cross key 19 while waiting for the customer is performed. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when the stop display of the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the reception of the stop command is performed during the output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variable effect according to the reception of the start command is started during the output of the confirmation sound. Even so, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but when the effect symbol 70a is stopped or displayed, the execution of the variable effect is started. In that case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
A specific example of a case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart in the case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal variation effect is delayed, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 64. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 64 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 61, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T4 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4 in FIG. 64 (N + in the middle of the second cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is issued from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Will be sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 65 (e)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, etc. should be started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 64, but the effect symbol 70a should be started. And the stop display of the special symbol TZ etc. will not be started. Then, the variation display period on the sub-first variation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the cross key 19 are used. The period during which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible will be extended (see FIG. 65 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 64, the output of the confirmation sound ends when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses (see FIG. 65 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 64, the stop time of the special symbol elapses. Then, the customer waiting state is entered, and the waiting period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is reached, and the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 64, when a predetermined period elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the non-animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is performed, and the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) are displayed at the symbol stop position. (= Stopped display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 65 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 64, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the previous operation of the cross key 19 for adjusting the volume) elapses, the volume value image OG is hidden (FIG. 65 (FIG. 65). i)) At the timing of T10 in FIG. 64, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 63 (FIG. 63). j)), and after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is disclosed.

Even when the staging control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the main control board is basically displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed. Similar to the case where the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command transmitted from 110, the variable effect is not executed. Therefore, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image. The OG will not be erased.

If the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in a non-animated manner, the effect symbol 70a and the special. Since the stop display of the symbol TZ is not performed, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

If the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not performed, so that a predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state was entered. Even if it has elapsed, the audible output of the variable BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. When the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in the state where the current fluctuation effect is not set, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the customer waiting state is set. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (customer waiting state specification command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the variation effect ends when the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately end the variable staging by starting the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command or stop command transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.) ), The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the staging control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command or the staging command transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.). Is designed to maintain the display of the volume value image OG until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the start command is received by the staging control board 130 in a state where the command is garbled due to wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, a variable effect (specifically, SP reach effect) is executed on the main display device 70 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, and the customer waiting state is in this state. When the specified command is received, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the loss normal reach variation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart when the loss normal reach variation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state, and FIGS. 67 to 68 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 66. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 66, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “0” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, three effect symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 67 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 66, when the normal reach effect in which the central effect symbol 70a scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 67 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 66, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 17 is displayed. The promotion effect that prompts the operation and the validity period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the promotion sound of "press" from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Is output (see FIG. 67 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 66, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect fails and ends with the normal reach effect is executed. .. Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 67 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 66, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see FIG. 67 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 66, when the central effect symbol 70a, which was scroll-displayed (updated and fluctuated) at a low speed, temporarily stops at "6", the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the center. The character of the effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a motion before stopping to shake the head), and the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result (“565”). Further, although the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped, the audible output of the variable BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 67 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 66, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 68 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 66, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 68 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 66, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“565”) and the special symbol TZ (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 68 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 66, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 68 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 66, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the customer waits state and the special symbol stops and displays the waiting period, and the main control board 110 waits for the customer from the effect control board 130. A status specification command is sent. After that, when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach effect is executed, when the normal reach effect is started, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach effect can be effectively excited. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the customer waits after the loss normal reach fluctuation effect, the effect BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output from the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a before the normal reach variation effect ends. Since it is in a state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach production has ended and that it has been lost, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Instead of stopping the output of the effect BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a, the variable BGM is audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM by the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a. You may do it. By doing so, when the normal reach fluctuation production with a low jackpot expectation is lost, the player will not be extremely discouraged.

(Specific example when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed)
A specific example of a case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

FIG. 69 is a timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed, and FIGS. 70 to 71 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 69. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 66, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scroll-displayed (updated variable), and the special symbol TZ is updated-variable (scrolled display, switched display). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 69, when the normal reach effect in which the central effect symbol 70a scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 69, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the main display device 70 is displayed. The promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the promotion sound of "press" from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Is output (see FIG. 70 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 69, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development success effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed. Will be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "I did it" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 70 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is changed to a display mode in which only numbers are displayed, and the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size (see FIG. 70 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the SP reach effect elapses, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the three effect symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size, and the first hold icon display area 70B is hidden together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 70 (d)). ..

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 69, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the voice output device 9 promotes "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 70 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 69, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at "6", so that the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result ("565") (FIG. 70 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shield image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, a model-specific character, etc.) that shields a background image, an effect symbol 70a, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 71 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 69, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 71 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 69, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“565”) and the special symbol TZ (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 71 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 69, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 71 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 69, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 71 (k). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 69 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold The display 83 becomes a “1” display, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started from the first (off) (see FIG. 71 (l)).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is restarted. (See FIG. 71 (l)).

Although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effect. The normal reach BGM reproduction is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the normal reach BGM output is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. It is designed to output SP reach BGM without doing so.

Further, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the case where the SP reach variation effect is lost is the same as the case where the SPSP reach effect is lost, and the effect symbol 70a which is lost in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted. , The effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size and the first aspect, and is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the pre-reading zone effect is executed and the pre-reading zone background is displayed and the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the reach state, it is normal as in the mode A background image. It is the same as the case where the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the reach state with the background image displayed, but the effect symbol 70a that is lost in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the normal background image before becoming the look-ahead zone background image ( For example, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image) is restarted, and the staging symbol 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the first variable effect (normal reach variable effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) suggesting whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the normal reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout effect. The blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed by muting (silence) while keeping it, returning the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach effect after the blackout effect to the audible output, In the second variation effect (SP / SPSP reach variation effect) to be executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Further, when the SP reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is a normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, it is normal. Along with changing to a third background image (SP reach background image) that indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the background image, the effect symbol 70a that forms a reach state and is temporarily stopped is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. Then, when the three staging symbols 70a are temporarily stopped due to a loss, the first background image (normal background image, mode A background image) is changed, and the three staging symbols 70a are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the effect of the SP reach effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the display mode of the effect symbol 70a changes, the mode of the effect operation (content of operation, cycle of operation, etc.) of the hold icon HI or the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the SP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI is hidden while the icon TI is displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the SPSP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable effect is executed again after the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed, while the SPSP reach effect is executed. In some cases, the special symbol TZ is hidden, but the display is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is completed, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the SPSP reach effect is finished and that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed to restore the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the staging symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed to return the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the hold icon HI and the icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP reach effect is started. You may.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effect period elapses during the blackout effect, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. You may. In this case, the development success effect or the development failure effect may be executed, or the normal reach effect may be restored or the SP reach effect may be developed without executing the development success effect or the development failure effect. good.

Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and the hold icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. May hide the hold icon HI and keep the icon TI displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and hide the hold icon HI and the icon TI during the execution of the SP SP reach effect.

(Specific example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
A specific example of the case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74.

72 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. 73 to 74 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 72. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T5 in FIG. 72 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T5 in FIG. 69, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 72, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the voice output device 9 promotes "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 73 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 72, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the staging position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the success image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at "5", so that the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the jackpot ("555") (FIG. 73 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including a model name) that shields a background image, an effect pattern 70a, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 73 (g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a big hit. Specifically, the light emission display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears is repeated twice in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds) (see FIG. 73 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 72, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Further, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 74 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 72, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. Further, when the second stop suggestion effect is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the effect symbol 70a (“555”) and the special symbol TZ (“555”) are started. The stop display at ()) is started (see FIG. 74 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 72, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 74 (j)).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T12 in FIG. 72, the opening designation command of the jackpot game is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130 (see FIG. 74 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 72, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command of the jackpot game, the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, an opening effect screen including the characters "big hit" is displayed, and it is suggested that the game ball is launched aiming at the right area (large winning opening) of the game area 5a in the right corner of the screen. The right-handed image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variable effect that becomes a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, it is hidden, but the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the variable effect that is a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained even when the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect. There is.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, is completed, the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the SPSP reach effect is finished and that the jackpot effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, one effect time (0.75 seconds) and cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is the cycle of the hold icon effect operation (sway operation, rotation operation) (sway operation, rotation operation). It is different from 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and it is possible to emphasize that the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect mode of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is that the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears, but one end of the numerical image portion of the effect symbol 70a. The effect image EF may move from one end to the other end and disappear, or the effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

Further, although the cumulative production time of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the cycle of the effect operation of the hold icon (2 seconds or 3 seconds), for example, one effect time of the light emission display effect can be set. By setting it to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

Further, although the hold icon HI is displayed again after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI may not be displayed again depending on the type of the SPSP reach effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach effect is executed or the second SPSP reach effect that is lost is executed, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the execution of the first stop suggestion effect, and it is a big hit. When the second SPSP reach effect is executed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion effect (displaying the eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI. You may.

In addition, the hold icon HI is displayed again after the end of the SPSP reach effect. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, the big hit effect symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped after the revival effect is executed, and the hold icon may be redisplayed, or the big hit effect symbol 70a may be displayed or held after the revival effect is executed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

If the stop command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect is larger than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect. It can be longer. Further, when the stop time command or the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect. It is getting longer.

(Specific example when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production)
A specific example of recovery from the power failure generated during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power failure generated during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 75. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 75, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scroll-displayed (updated variable), and the special symbol TZ is updated-variable (scrolled display, switched display). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 76 (a)).

Next, when a power failure occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at the timing of T1 in FIG. 75, the main control board 110 performs a process when the power is cut off, and the first special symbol display 60 and the like are displayed. The main information display 59 including the main information display 59, the sub information display 80 including the sub first variation display, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are hidden, and the game sound output from the voice output device 9 ( (Variable BGM, etc.) is also in a non-output state (see FIG. 76 (b)).

Then, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 75, the reading screen (initial screen) including the characters "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. A command when the power is turned on from the main control board 110 that has restored the control state of the game to the state before the power failure occurred to the effect control board 130 (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). The recovery designation command, the first special symbol storage designation command, and the second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is restarted from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol hold indicator is displayed. The "2" display of the first hold number in 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 76 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 75, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the command when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned power recovery notification and the initial stage of various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) At the same time as the operation (including the return operation) is started, the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 76 (d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power recovery notification, the power recovery image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power restoration, power restoration at the time of power restoration). The effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, which are the initial appearances of the image, the hold icon HI according to the number of holds and the effect mode when the power is restored, the hold number according to the number of holds when the power is restored, etc.) are lower than the power recovery image. Image data for power recovery notification set in the layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various effect images is restricted by the power recovery image, but the background image and the hold icon are in the effect operation state, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position. Become. Further, the hold icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if the special display mode is before the power cut, and the icon TI is hidden even if it is displayed before the power cut. (See FIG. 76 (d)).

Further, in the sub information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub first fluctuation display 81 and the sub second fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped without displaying the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 and the sub are displayed. The second hold indicator 84 is in a state of displaying the number of holds (see FIG. 76 (d)).

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 75 (power restoration notification is ongoing), the first hold number becomes "3" and the first special symbol hold indicator 63. Is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130 (see FIG. 77 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 75, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83 display “3”. Become. In addition, additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the third display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is started by animation, but it is visually recognized by the power recovery image set in the upper layer. Is in a regulated state (see FIG. 77 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 75, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses after the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is completed, the stop command (design) from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Confirmation command) is sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 77 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 75, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the power recovery notification ends, and various staging images whose visibility is restricted by the power recovery image. (Background image according to the effect mode when the power is restored, effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ which are the initial appearances when the power is restored, the current hold number and the hold icon HI according to the effect mode, and the current hold number. (Holding numbers, etc.) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 78 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 75, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "3" to "2" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "2" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 78 (i). )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 75 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “2”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 78 (j)).

Further, the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is started. (See FIG. 78 (j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 75 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Further, the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 78 (k)).

When the effect mode D (probability variation game state) is controlled or the effect mode F is controlled when the power is restored, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode. The numerical image of the symbol 70a becomes the initial effect symbol "753" which is common to the case where the effect mode A (normal game state) is controlled when the power is restored. In addition, when the power is restored to the effect mode D (probability changing game state), the initial effect symbol is set to "246" or the like so as to be distinguished from the case where the effect mode A (normal game state) is controlled when the power is restored. You may do it.

Further, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Therefore, the staging control board 130 receives the customer waiting state specification command while the reading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and is waiting for the execution of the variable staging without the power recovery notification being performed (staging pattern). The variable standby screen (where 70a can be visually recognized) will be displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game, it takes time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the main control board 110. Therefore, after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power recovery notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set as the upper layer. By generating image data in which the hold icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set in the lower layer and displaying it on the main display device 70, the hold icon in the lower layer is restricted from being visually recognized. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored. Further, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, if a special symbol memory designation command indicating that the number of holds has increased is received, the increase is responded to. Image data including the hold icon is generated. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, even when the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, the hold icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased) by animation when the number of holds increases. There is. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is different depending on whether the control is performed in the first effect mode (effect mode A) or in the second effect mode (effect modes D and F) when the power is restored. However, the numerical image of the staging symbol 70a is designed to have common numerical information (“753”). Therefore, even if the display mode of the effect symbol differs depending on the effect mode after the power is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power is restored.

Further, in the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64) and the second display hold area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84). , The display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the look-ahead result, but the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70). Then, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the look-ahead result, and when the power supply is stopped, the hold display is not performed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored. Is the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 63) rather than the restart timing of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70). , The second special symbol hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84), the hold display restart timing is earlier. Therefore, it is possible to let the player grasp the number of holdings at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. It should be noted that the hold display restart timing in the first hold display area may be earlier than the hold display restart timing in the second hold display area.

Further, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the special display mode before the occurrence of the power failure is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, it is not necessary to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon is in the special display mode in the staging control board 130, and it is possible to avoid complicating the hardware configuration of the staging control board 130. ..

Further, after the power is restored, the hold icon is visibly displayed after the fluctuation display (blinking due to the moving lighting of the LED) on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is resumed. It has become like. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after displaying the power recovery image, the initial operation (including the return operation) of various accessories (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71, effect button 17) performs the effect operation at different timings for each accessory. It is designed to be executed in the same manner as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the initial operation of various accessories is executed by the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is a staging operation.

The sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped and displayed without displaying the fluctuation during the power recovery notification, but the power recovery notification is in progress ( The variation display may be performed after receiving the second power recovery designation command indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol confirmation command) is received.

(Specific example when the start command could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
A specific example of the case where the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

79 is a timing chart when the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 80 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 79. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 79, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, three effect symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 80 (a)).

Next, when the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1 in FIG. 79, the above-mentioned in-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a side-scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image of "ZONE" is displayed. Further, the volume of the variable BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 80 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 79, when the central effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated and fluctuated) temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the character of the central effect symbol 70a. Performs an effect operation (an operation before stopping to shake the head), and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 80 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound is stopped, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110. A stop command (design confirmation command) is sent to. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started (. See FIG. 80 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 80 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 79, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 81 (g). )reference).

However, since the staging control board 130 could not normally receive the start command, the hold display was originally updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. 79 (the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83. Update, hold icon HI shift display) and variable staging should be executed, but they will not be executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect effect that should be executed from the current variation effect to the two variation effects is not started. However, even during the extension period of the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the side-scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the effect operation of the hold icon HI are continuously performed. (See FIG. 81 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 79, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 81 (i)).

However, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be executed. Will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 79, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is started (FIG. 81 (j). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 79 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold The display 83 becomes a “0” display, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 81 (k)).

Further, of the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the change display of the previous special symbol is erased in a non-animated manner, and the second hold icon HI is deleted. The hold icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the display unit is displayed in the first display unit in a non-animated manner. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit starts the shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 81 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 79 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect to be executed from the previous variation effect to the two variation effects. The effect is started one time later, and the blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 81 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 79 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a is started.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the special symbol to be executed for the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbol for which the predetermined look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) should be started, the special symbol is used. It is restricted that a predetermined look-ahead effect is started during the variable display, and if the variable effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol to be executed next, the pre-reading restricted during the variable display of this special symbol is performed. The production has started. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation display of the special symbol is executed but the variation effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable BGM (suggestion effect sound) is output during the execution of the variable effect (suggestion effect) for suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, and the target variable effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. From the front, a zone BGM (preliminary effect sound) suggesting that a special game may be executed is output, and a zone BGM is output even after the start of the target variation effect, and when the zone BGM is output. , The suggestion effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, the effect of the look-ahead zone effect can be enhanced, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The volume of the variable BGM is reduced during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (during the output of the zone BGM), but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. You may do it.

Further, even if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect for starting the icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect executed over a plurality of variation effects is not executed, the next execution is performed. The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variable effect to be performed.

In addition, the look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. A look-ahead countdown effect that performs countdown audio output) may be executed, or a look-ahead chance eye effect that stops and displays a so-called chance eye (a roll having a certain rule such as 556 or 667) is executed for each variable effect. Or you may try to perform those three look-ahead effects.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command is received while the menu image is displayed)
A specific example of the case where the power-on designation command is received while the menu image is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 83.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of production at various timings of FIG. 82. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 82, there is a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. At this time, the loss special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60, and the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation) on the main display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed. Is in a state of being stopped and displayed at the loss result (“537”) which is the stop result of the previous fluctuation effect. Further, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 83 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T1 in FIG. 82, the menu operation becomes valid, and the main display device 70 has a plurality of types of selection items (games) in a state of overlapping in front of the effect symbol 70a. "Model description" item that displays the explanation about the machine 1, "Production customization" item for customizing the effect in the variable effect, "Pachi log" item for log management linked with the mobile phone) The menu image MG including the above is displayed (see FIG. 83 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 82, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the main control board 110 (disconnection, disconnection of the connector, etc.), the main control board 110 The process when the power is cut off is performed, and the main information display 59 including the first special symbol display 60 is in a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub-information display device 80, the main display device 70, and the sub-display device 71 continue (see FIG. 83 (c)).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3 in FIG. 82, a checksum determination is made as to whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged, and the data is damaged. Processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game. Then, a power ON time command (here, a power-on designation command, a first special symbol storage designation command, and a second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, information display on the main information display 59 (display of a lost special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, etc.) is started (see FIG. 83 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 82, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the power ON command, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 include the characters "NOW ROADING". The reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub information display 80 is hidden for a moment, and the game sound (variable BGM, etc.) is not output on the voice output device 9 (FIG. 83 (e)). reference).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 82, when a predetermined period elapses after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of the above-mentioned power-on notification and various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) are restored. (Including the operation) is started, and the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 83 (f)).

At this time, in the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the initial appearance (“135”) at the time of turning on the power in front of the mode A background image in which the side-scrolling (effect operation) is started. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. Further, the power-on notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the mute output at the cue of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 83 (f)).

Even when the power restoration designation command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial outcomes (“753”) at the time of power restoration. Except for the point and the point that the power-on notification sound is not output, it is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

Also, when the power ON command (power ON specification command, power recovery specification command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the power ON command is basically received while the menu image MG is being displayed. Same as the case.

In this way, the command received from the main control board 110 by the effect control board 130 while displaying the menu image MG on the main display device 70 is a power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command). In this case, the main display device 70 makes the menu image invisible and displays an image (reading screen or the like) corresponding to the command when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game is ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the ball lending is arranged in parallel with the game machine 1. Although it is possible to pay out a game ball based on a payout request from the machine (ball lending), a game ball based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the progress control of the game is started and the game becomes playable. It may be possible to pay out (pachinko).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) is not paid out when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Although the payout ball number data does not remain, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. If the unpaid payout number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid payout ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out the game ball based on it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). The ball may be managed as data and the prize ball data may be added (addition to the possession ball data).

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effect with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the upper side and / or the lower side of the screen so as to cross the screen, and the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. The zone image may be displayed on the left side and / or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both of the two look-ahead zone effects, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot notice effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the main display device 70 may execute the whiteout effect. In this case, the basic flow of the production may be the same as that of the blackout production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the variable staging is basically the same between the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), but for example, the pre-stage staging in the normal game state. Post-stage production (pre-reach production and reach production case, normal reach production and SP reach production case, SP reach production and SPSP reach production case, pre-reach production and production design temporarily stopped case, reach production and production design The first information (information suggesting a jackpot expectation level, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the subsequent stage effect of the variable effect consisting of (the case during the temporary stop of 70a, etc.). Second information different from the first information during the execution of the second stage effect of the variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the specific game state (additional information of the music that can be selected by operating the cross key 19), mission achievement status Etc.) may be notified. Further, as a variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the normal gaming state, there is a case where the common second stage effect is executed after the first first stage effect is executed, and a case where the second first stage effect different from the first first stage effect is executed. The common post-stage effect may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the determination result of the determination information and also execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (). For example, see JP-A-2018-118109). However, with such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the gaming production, and there is a problem that the interest of the gaming is poor.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect in the variation effect is different from the start timing of the cycle variation. The variation display of a predetermined mode of the symbol (scroll display after the pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start of the frame update of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the predetermined mode of the staging symbol is started. Although it does not match the timing, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the predetermined mode of the staging symbol is started. ) May not be included.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation is after the end of the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol. The variation display (scroll display after the pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) of the predetermined mode of the effect symbol in the effect is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed. The variation display (update variation) of the special symbol is started at a timing different from the start timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. It may be that.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and in the cycle variation. After the first display change is started, the variation display (update variation) of the special symbol is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84). It is possible to reduce the hold display according to the decrease in the hold memory, and the decrease display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the reduction display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the decrease display of the hold display is started. It may be.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (display of hold icon HI and hold number on the main display device 70, hold on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84). It is possible to display) and decrease the hold display according to the decrease of the hold memory, so that the decrease display of the hold display is started after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation is started. It has become. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and reduced (changed to the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, the shift display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be that.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and reduced (changed to the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, the shift display of the hold display ends after the first cycle change in the change display of the special symbol ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means comprises means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and displayed as the corresponding display (the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. The shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) may be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display may be shifted and displayed as the corresponding display (the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. It is possible, and the shift display ends after the first display change in the cycle variation is completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems is a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (main control board 110) for controlling the effect according to the command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variation start sound) is executed during the execution of the variation effect. , Temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. It may not be included in.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and audibly output the effect BGM (variation BGM) during the execution of the variation effect. The audible output of the staging BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the staging BGM is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4MS) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the staging BGM is started. It may be that.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the background image displayed on the background of the effect symbol is produced (horizontally scrolling, horizontal scrolling, It is possible to change the scene, etc.), and the staging operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen is started after the power is turned on). There is. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interruption of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the effect operation of the background image is started. Although it does not match, the timer interruption period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the effect operation of the background image is started. It may be that.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the background image displayed on the background of the effect symbol is produced (horizontally scrolling, horizontal scrolling, It is possible to change the scene, etc.), and the background image effect operation is performed before the start of the first cycle fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen is started after the power is turned on). ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol has a predetermined mode at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. Is displayed (stop display, temporary stop display). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit in which the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined mode. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined mode. It may be that.

A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and an effect control means (main control board 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol ends. The effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed. The special symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here does not match the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even if the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. good.

◆ As the eighteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) corresponding to the hold storage stored in the storage means can be made to perform an effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) during the execution of the variation effect, and the special symbol can be changed. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the display, the effect operation of the hold display is continuously performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◇ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to display the corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information on which the determination is executed, and to make the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last in the variable display of the special symbol. The disappearance display of the corresponding display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the frame update start timing of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. It may be that.

◆ As the twentieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , It is possible to display the corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information on which the determination was executed, and to make the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last in the variation display of the special symbol. After the cycle fluctuation of the above is completed, the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variation start sound) is executed during the execution of the variation effect. , Temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. It is possible to end at a timing different from the timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is terminated. It may not be included in.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and a predetermined game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) is produced during the execution of the variation effect. It is possible to output audibly, and the audible output of the predetermined gaming sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol may be terminated before the cycle variation ends. It is possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to the command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and a predetermined gaming sound (variable BGM) is audibly output during the execution of the variation effect. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol (during the stop display), the predetermined gaming sound can be continuously audibly output. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 24th configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the staging control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the background image displayed on the background of the effect symbol is being executed. It is possible to perform an effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image continues even after the end of the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol (during stop display). It is supposed to be done. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second. The variable display of the special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the small hit game is not executed because there is no small hit as a result of the big hit determination. Then, regardless of the set value, it is determined as a small hit with the same first probability (for example, 1/300), and in the big hit determination when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, any setting is made. Even if it is a value, it may be determined as a small hit with the same second probability (for example, 1/7). In this case, a specific area is provided inside the first variable winning unit 49, and the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 passes through the specific area during the small hit game, so that the big hit game is executed. It may be a +2 type of gaming machine.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, the game shall be shifted to the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game, and the jackpot game (via the small hit game) based on the winning of the first starting port 45. (Including) is executed, the normal game state and the time-saving game state shall be shifted at a ratio of 1: 1 and the big hit game (including via the small hit game) based on the winning of the second starting port 47. When is executed, it is advisable to shift to the time-saving gaming state with a 100% probability. In this case, if the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is completed, the number of time-saving games is set to one, and the jackpot game based on the winning of the second starting port 47 is set. When the game shifts to the time saving game state after the end, it is preferable to set the number of time saving times to 5 times and 10 times at a ratio of 1: 1.

Further, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, if a small hit is determined by the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the normal gaming state, the big hit game is used as the final icon display mode in the icon change effect. The rainbow icon whose execution is confirmed is not determined, and when it is determined as a small hit by the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the time-saving game state, the rainbow icon is determined as the icon final display mode in the icon change effect. You may do it.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the game using the medal (game medium) (giving condition is satisfied), a predetermined amount is obtained. It can also be used for a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a prize medal (prize medal data) to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 General gate 45 1st starting port 47 2nd starting port 50 1st big winning opening 56 2nd big winning opening 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Staging control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means.
The main control means
A determination means for determining determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage,
A variable display means for executing variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination is provided.
The variable display means is
As the variation display of the special symbol, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times with the change to a plurality of display modes as one cycle, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
The display period of each display mode in one cycle of the cycle fluctuation is made shorter than the execution period of the stop display of the special symbol.
The staging control means
It is possible to execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol.
It is possible to display the corresponding display corresponding to the determination information in which the determination is executed, and to display the corresponding display disappearing at a predetermined timing.
The disappearance display of the corresponding display is started at a timing after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation in the variation display of the special symbol, and the timing before the execution period of the stop display of the special symbol elapses. A gaming machine characterized in that the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends.

Images